summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/69838-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/69838-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/69838-0.txt8360
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8360 deletions
diff --git a/old/69838-0.txt b/old/69838-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index c1dc318..0000000
--- a/old/69838-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8360 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of Captain Chap, by Frank R. Stockton
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: Captain Chap
- or, The Rolling Stones
-
-Author: Frank R. Stockton
-
-Illustrator: Charles H. Stephens
-
-Release Date: January 19, 2023 [eBook #69838]
-
-Language: English
-
-Produced by: Tim Lindell, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed
- Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was
- produced from images generously made available by The
- Internet Archive/Canadian Libraries)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN CHAP ***
-
-
-[Illustration: The panther was now within four or five feet of the boat.
-
- Page 196.]
-
-
-
-
- _CAPTAIN CHAP_
-
- _OR_
-
- _The Rolling Stones_
-
- _BY_
- _FRANK R. STOCKTON_
-
- _Author of “Rudder Grange,” “A Jolly Fellowship,” etc._
-
- _ILLUSTRATED BY
- CHARLES H. STEPHENS_
-
- [Illustration]
-
- _PHILADELPHIA
- J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY
- 1897_
-
-
-
-
- Copyright, 1882, by JAMES ELVERSON.
-
- Copyright, 1896, by J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY.
-
-
- ELECTROTYPED AND PRINTED BY J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA,
- U. S. A.
-
-
-
-
-_CONTENTS_
-
-
- CHAPTER PAGE
-
- I.--“THE BEST THING YOU EVER HEARD OF” 7
-
- II.--A SEA VOYAGE 16
-
- III.--“A CONTINENT BEFORE US” 27
-
- IV.--WITH HOOK AND LINE 38
-
- V.--CHAP’S ALLIGATOR 50
-
- VI.--THE ROLLING STONE 65
-
- VII.--THE TWO ORPHANS 73
-
- VIII.--“CAPTAIN OF HIMSELF” 83
-
- IX.--FRIENDS AND ENEMIES 92
-
- X.--PHIL’S UNCLE AND CHAP’S SISTER 101
-
- XI.--TWO EXPEDITIONS 111
-
- XII.--CHAP LEADS THE INDIANS 119
-
- XIII.--ADAM LEADS HIS PARTY 127
-
- XIV.--CHAP’S AMBASSADOR 140
-
- XV.--THE FORCES MEET 145
-
- XVI.--MARY BROWN SENDS A MESSAGE 154
-
- XVII.--THE CHANNEL-BASS 163
-
- XVIII.--CHAP BOARDS THE MAGGIE 172
-
- XIX.--WAITING FOR A VISITOR 182
-
- XX.--THE VISITOR ARRIVES 190
-
- XXI.--THE METROPOLIS OF THE INDIAN RIVER 197
-
- XXII.--THE COLONEL 204
-
- XXIII.--A NEW EXPEDITION PLANNED 211
-
- XXIV.--COOT BREWER TAKES THE HELM 219
-
- XXV.--AMONG THE ALLIGATORS 224
-
- XXVI.--THE MAGGIE COMES TO TOWN 234
-
- XXVII.--THE RACE THROUGH THE WOODS 243
-
- XXVIII.--A PLOT AGAINST CHAP 251
-
- XXIX.--HOW ADAM WAS BAGGED 259
-
- XXX.--THE COUNTESS 267
-
- XXXI.--A POINT OF HONOR 273
-
- XXXII.--CHAP IS DOWN UPON ARISTOCRACY 282
-
- XXXIII.--WHICH FINISHES THE STORY 289
-
-
-
-
-_LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS_
-
-
- PAGE
-
- The panther was now within four or five
- feet of the boat _Frontispiece._
-
- The rescue 21
-
- Adam tucking the other under his left arm 81
-
- “Crouch down there, you varlets!” 177
-
- “Don’t fire!” screamed Coot 226
-
- “Now we’ll give it to him” 261
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-_CAPTAIN CHAP_
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER I.
-
-“THE BEST THING YOU EVER HEARD OF.”
-
-
-It was the month of October, and yet for the boys who belonged to
-the school of Mr. Wallace, in Boontown, the summer vacation was not
-yet over. Mr. Wallace had been taken sick, and although he was now
-recovering, it was not expected that he would be able to resume the
-labors of his school until about the middle of November.
-
-Everybody liked Mr. Wallace, and very few of his patrons wished to
-enter their boys at another school when it was expected he would
-certainly re-open his establishment in the course of the fall. Most
-of his scholars, therefore, were pursuing their studies at home,
-according to methods which he recommended, and this plan was generally
-considered far more satisfactory than for the boys to go for a short
-time to other schools, where the systems of study were probably very
-different from those of Mr. Wallace.
-
-It is true that some of the boys did not study very much during this
-extension of the vacation, but then it must be remembered that those
-who expect boys to do always everything that is right are very apt to
-be disappointed.
-
-Philip Berkeley, who lived with his uncle, Mr. Godfrey Berkeley, at
-Hyson Hall, on the banks of one of Pennsylvania’s most beautiful
-rivers, had studied a good deal since the time when his vacation should
-have ended, for he was a boy naturally inclined to that sort of thing,
-and he had, besides, the example of his uncle--who was hard at work
-studying law--continually before his eyes. But his two most particular
-friends, Chapman Webster and Phineas Poole, did not subject their
-school-books to any great amount of wear and tear.
-
-Chap Webster was a lively, energetic boy, always ready to engage in
-some enterprise of work or play; and Phineas, generally called Phœnix
-by his companions, was such a useful fellow on his father’s farm that
-he was usually kept pretty busy at one thing or another whenever he was
-at home.
-
-At the time our story begins, Chap Webster had, for a week, been living
-in what he considered the most delightful kind of clover. He was a
-great lover of the water, although he had no particular desire for a
-mariner’s life, in the ordinary sense of the term.
-
-Accustomed since a child to the broad waters of the river, he had a
-great fancy for what might be called the inland marine service, and his
-highest ambition was to be captain of a tug-boat.
-
-To course up and down the river in one of these swift and powerful
-little vessels, and to make fast to a great ship ever and ever so much
-larger than the “tug,” and to tow her along against wind and tide,
-appeared to Chap a most delightful thing to do. There was a sense of
-power in it which pleased him.
-
-He was now paying a visit to a relative in the city, who was one of
-the officers of a tug-boat company, and this gave Chap an opportunity
-to take frequent trips on his favorite vessels. He enjoyed all this so
-much that I fear he was in no hurry for his school to begin.
-
-It was on a Monday afternoon that Philip and Phœnix were at the
-railroad station in Boontown. Each had come to town on an errand for
-his family, and they were now waiting for the three o’clock train from
-the city to come in.
-
-The first person who jumped from the cars was Chap Webster, and his
-feet had scarcely touched the platform before he spied his two friends.
-
-“Hello, boys!” he cried, striding toward them. “I’m glad I found you
-here. I want to tell you the best thing you ever heard of! I’m going
-down to the Breakwater to-morrow on a tug-boat, and you two can go
-along if your folks will let you. I’ve fixed the whole thing up right.
-We’ll be gone two days and a night. And I tell you what it is, boys,
-it will be more than glorious! We’re going down after a big steamer,
-that’s broken her propeller-blades and has to be towed up to the city.
-I came up to tell you fellows, and see what my people said about it.
-But I know they’ll agree, and I don’t want you to let your folks put in
-any objections. It’ll be just as safe as staying at home, and there’s
-entirely too much fun in it for any of us to miss it.”
-
-Neither Phil nor Phœnix hesitated for an instant in agreeing that
-Chap’s idea was a splendid one.
-
-Mr. Berkeley, Phil’s uncle, when the subject was laid before him about
-an hour afterward, gave a hearty approval to the plan, for he was very
-glad that Phil should have an opportunity to enjoy an excursion of the
-kind.
-
-His summer vacation had been filled up much more with work and
-responsibility than with recreation, and his uncle considered that a
-trip of some kind was certainly his due.
-
-But the matter did not appear in the same light in the eyes of Mr.
-Poole. Now that Phœnix was not going to school, he thought it the boy’s
-duty to make himself useful about the house and farm, and there were a
-great many things he wanted him to do.
-
-When Phœnix came over to Hyson Hall early the next morning, and told
-Phil he didn’t believe his father intended to let him go on this jolly
-old trip, Mr. Berkeley ordered his horse, Jouncer, to be saddled, and
-rode over to the Poole farm.
-
-When he came back, he found Chap Webster with the other boys, and
-a noisy indignation meeting going on. He put a speedy stop to the
-proceedings, by informing the members of the small assemblage that Mr.
-Poole had consented to let Phœnix join the tug-boat party.
-
-This news was received with a unanimous shout, and the boys separated
-to get ready as quickly as possible for the expedition, for they were
-to start for the city on the noon train.
-
-“Take your heavy overcoats with you,” said Mr. Berkeley, as Chap and
-Phœnix were bidding him a hasty good-by; “for it may be cold on the
-water at night, and you had better each take a change of linen with
-you, and some underclothes.”
-
-“What!” cried Phil; “for a little trip like this?”
-
-“Yes,” said Mr. Berkeley. “I am an old traveller, and I know that a
-great many things happen on these little trips. One of you may tumble
-overboard, and need a dry shirt, and at any rate you ought to feel that
-you may rough it as much as you please, and yet look clean and decent
-when you are coming home.”
-
-Hyson Hall was appointed for the rendezvous of the boys, and, after
-a slight luncheon, Joel drove them over to Boontown. But before they
-started Mr. Berkeley gave each of them a long, stout fishing-line,
-suitable for salt-water fishing.
-
-“You may have a chance to use these,” he said, “and I don’t believe any
-of your own lines are strong enough for deep-water work.”
-
-He gave Phil a pocket lantern and a tin box of matches, with a paper of
-extra fish-hooks and various other little articles, which might be of
-use.
-
-“If I’d been going by myself,” said Chap, “I’d have just clapped on my
-hat, and started for town.”
-
-“Yes,” said Phœnix, “and then, when you got a chance to fish, you’d
-have growled because you hadn’t a line. I tell you what it is, Phil,
-your uncle knows what he is about. I wish I knew what he said to
-father.”
-
-“Some magic words,” said Chap; “but you needn’t think anybody is ever
-going to tell them to you. You’d go round slinging spells over your
-whole family, and having everything your own way. I rather think you’d
-have an easy time of it.”
-
-“Yes,” said Phœnix, “you’re about right, and when any work turned up
-that I wanted to do, I’d chuck a spell over a long-legged fellow named
-Chap Webster, and make him come and help.”
-
-“Joel,” said Chap, “hadn’t you better touch up the noble beast? We
-don’t want to be late, you know.”
-
-“We’ll get there soon enough,” said Joel. “I drive on time, and I never
-miss trains.”
-
-“If you hurry up people that way, Chap,” said Phil, “you’ll have this
-trip over sooner than you want it to be.”
-
-“You needn’t worry your mind about that,” said Chap. “When we get on
-the real trip, I’m the fellow to help stretch it out as far as it will
-go.”
-
-The trip down the river and bay was quite as enjoyable as the boys had
-expected it to be. The little tug was not very commodious, and not very
-clean, but there was a small after-deck, on which they could lounge
-quite comfortably.
-
-The boys had never been far below the city, and the scenery was novel
-and interesting to them. Chap would have been glad to have the tug stop
-occasionally, so that they could have a chance to fish; but he had
-sense enough not to propose anything of the kind to the captain.
-
-They reached their destination the next day, and it was then found that
-the steamer with the broken propeller was not quite ready to be towed
-up; and it was decided not to start with her on her trip up the river
-until the following morning.
-
-In the course of the afternoon, however, some work appeared for the
-captain of the tug-boat. Far out to sea a schooner was perceived, with
-her foremast and part of her bowsprit gone, and endeavoring, against a
-head-wind, to make her way to the refuge of the Breakwater.
-
-There was a strong wind blowing from the north, with a chance of its
-getting farther to the east before long, and it was considered doubtful
-whether the disabled schooner would be able to get in before a storm
-came on.
-
-“Boys,” said the captain, coming aft to where our friends were sitting,
-“I’ve made up my mind to go out and offer to tow that schooner in. I
-might as well be making some money for the company as to lie here doing
-nothing. But I think it’s going to be pretty rough, and, if you fellows
-don’t care to go along, I’ll put you ashore.”
-
-The boys, who had been so much interested in everything around them
-that they had not even taken out their fishing-lines, cried out at once
-that they would not think of going ashore. Nothing would please them
-more than a trip out to sea.
-
-“The rougher the better!” cried Chap. “I just want to feel what it is
-like to be tossed on the ocean wave.”
-
-“All right!” said the captain, with a grin. “We’ll toss you.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER II.
-
-A SEA VOYAGE.
-
-
-It was not long after this little conversation that the tug-boat was
-bravely puffing out to sea. The wind was strong and the waves ran
-pretty high, but the boat made her way over the rough water without
-difficulty.
-
-The boys were delighted with the motion of the vessel as it plunged
-over the waves, and none of them felt in the least degree sick.
-
-Chap wished to go out on the bow, where he could stand and see the boat
-“breast the billows;” but he was not allowed to do this, for every now
-and then a shower of spray came over the bows, and he would have been
-drenched to the skin in ten minutes. Even where they sat in the stern,
-the boys were frequently treated to a shower of spray; but this, as
-they wore their overcoats, they did not mind in the least.
-
-It took them longer to near the schooner than they had supposed it
-would, for she was making very slow headway against the wind, and in
-some of her long tacks she seemed to the boys as if she were trying to
-keep out of their way.
-
-At last, however, they reached her, and the tug steamed close enough to
-her side to allow the people on board to be hailed. But, to the disgust
-of the captain of the tug-boat, his offers to tow the disabled vessel
-into shelter were declined.
-
-Her captain believed that he could work her in without any help, and he
-did not wish to incur the expense of being towed.
-
-“All right, then!” said the captain of the tug-boat to the boys, who
-stood near him. “She can run in by herself, and perhaps she’ll make
-the Breakwater in a week or two. We have lost nothing but some of our
-owners’ coal, and you fellows have had a sea trip. And now we will run
-back again.”
-
-The captain made two mistakes that day. One was when he thought he was
-going to make some money by towing a schooner and the other was when he
-thought he was going to run in again.
-
-The tug-boat had not gone ten minutes on her returning course, when
-suddenly her machinery stopped, and in a few moments the boat turned
-about and began to roll in the trough of the sea.
-
-There was now a good deal of confusion in the engine-room, and there
-the boys made their way, not without difficulty, for the rolling motion
-of the boat made it very hard for them to keep their feet.
-
-In the engine-room they found the captain, the engineer, and one or two
-others of the small crew. Something had broken, the boys knew not what,
-for no one seemed to have time to explain the matter to them.
-
-Efforts were being made to repair the injury. There was a great deal of
-hammering and banging and loud talking, and presently the engine let
-off the steam from the boiler, which made such a noise it was almost
-impossible to hear anything that was not shouted into one’s ear.
-
-Perceiving that they were in the way, and could find out nothing, and
-were to be told nothing, the boys prudently retired into the inner
-cabin. Here Phil and Chap became quite sick. They could stand the
-pitching and tossing of the boat as she rose over and plunged down the
-waves, but this rolling motion was too much for them.
-
-The two unfortunates crawled into the little bunks in which they had
-slept the night before, while Phœnix, with an air of brave resignation,
-braced himself against the cabin-door, and waited to see what would
-happen next.
-
-Nothing seemed to happen next. After awhile the noise of the escaping
-steam grew less, and then it stopped. The hammering and banging had
-also ceased, and thinking that everything was all right now, Phœnix
-went forward to see how things were going on.
-
-It was not easy to see much, for the engine-room was lighted only by
-a hanging lantern, but he met the captain, who informed him that they
-were in a bad way. One of the connecting-rods had been broken, and
-as the engine was not stopped soon enough, some other parts of the
-machinery had been damaged.
-
-“We have tried to patch her up,” said the captain, “but it is no go.
-All we can do is to make everything tight, and lie here until some
-vessel comes along to give us a tow in. This has been a pretty bad day
-for us, for we’re not going to take any steamer up the river to-morrow.”
-
-“How long do you think you’ll have to stay here?” asked Phœnix.
-
-“Don’t know,” answered the captain. “Something may come along pretty
-soon, and we may not be towed in till morning. But you needn’t be
-afraid. We’ll make everything tight, and though we may roll and pitch,
-we won’t take in any water.”
-
-“I suppose that vessel with a broken mast couldn’t help us?” said
-Phœnix.
-
-“No,” said the captain, “it is more than she can do to take care of
-herself, and she is out of sight now, although she isn’t any nearer
-the Breakwater than we are.”
-
-“Perhaps some steamboat will come out after us when they find we don’t
-come back,” suggested Phœnix.
-
-“That may be,” said the captain, willing to give his young passengers
-as much encouragement as possible. “But you fellows had better get
-something to eat, and turn in. You’ll be more comfortable in your bunks
-while we are rolling about in this way.”
-
-But Chap and Phil did not want anything to eat. The very idea was
-horrible to them. And so Phœnix ate his hard biscuit and some cold
-meat, for there seemed to be no intention of even boiling a pot of
-coffee, and then he crawled into his little bunk.
-
-“Boys,” groaned Chap, “I don’t care for a tug-boat as much as I used
-to.”
-
-“Care for it!” said Phil, in a weak voice. “I hope I may never----”
-
-And here his remark ended; he was too sick to say what he hoped.
-
-The night was a horrible one. Occasionally the boys slept; but as they
-found, whenever they dropped into a doze, they were very apt to roll
-out of their bunks, they were obliged to keep awake most of the time.
-As soon as daylight appeared, they were all anxious to go outside,
-feeling that a breath of fresh air would be better than anything
-else in the world. This the captain, who seemed to have been up all
-night, would not allow.
-
-[Illustration: The rescue.]
-
-“You’d be washed overboard,” he said, “and things are bad enough as
-they are, without any of you getting drowned. There’s a regular gale
-off shore, and we haven’t sighted an inward-bound steamer yet.”
-
-In the course of an hour or two, it was evident that a vessel ought
-to be sighted very soon, for the tug, which was not built for such
-rough work as this, had, in spite of the efforts of the crew to make
-everything tight on the decks, shipped a good deal of water, and it was
-necessary to work the pumps. But this did not help matters, for it was
-found that a leak had sprung somewhere, and the water came in faster
-than it could be pumped out.
-
-The tug was now far from the land, and in the path of coastwise
-steamers; and before noon the welcome sight of a line of smoke appeared
-on the horizon. It was a steamer which was approaching them, but,
-unfortunately, it was going southward, and not northward.
-
-“She’s a Savannah steamer,” said the captain, “but we’ve got to git on
-board of her, no matter where she is going; for this old boat can’t
-stand this sort of thing much longer. We’ve been blowing out from
-shore all night, and there’s no time for anything to come out after us
-now.”
-
-The boys looked aghast.
-
-“Savannah!” they cried. “We don’t want to go to Savannah!”
-
-“It’s a good sight better place than the bottom of the ocean,” said the
-captain.
-
-It was a bad bargain for the boys, but they had to make the best of it.
-
-“What are you going to do in Savannah?” asked Phœnix, in a tone of
-dismay.
-
-“It can’t take us more than a couple of days to get there,” said Phil,
-“and then we can telegraph home. As soon as our folks know where we
-are, I shall feel that everything is all right.”
-
-“I shan’t feel that anything is all right until we know where we are
-ourselves,” said Chap, looking out of one of the little windows of the
-cabin. “Did you ever see such a pokey old steamer as that is? I believe
-we shall sink before she gets to us.”
-
-But this unfortunate event did not happen, although the tug was very
-deep in the water and rolling heavily when the steamer lay to, with her
-bow to the wind, a few hundred yards away from them.
-
-A large boat was speedily lowered and rowed to the tug. In less than
-half an hour the unfortunate occupants of the sinking tug-boat had been
-taken on the steamer.
-
-A few articles were brought away from the tug, and the boys were
-allowed to carry with them their valises.
-
-As soon as the boat-load of people was on the steamer, and the boat
-hauled up to its davits, the vessel put about, and proceeded on her way.
-
-As the boys looked back, they saw the little tug, with her smoke-stack
-very much on one side, and but little of her hull visible, tossing and
-pitching on the waves.
-
-“She isn’t good for another half-hour,” said the engineer, who stood by.
-
-The party rescued from the sinking tug-boat was very kindly received on
-board the steamer, but it was quite evident, even to the hopeful and
-enthusiastic Chap, that there was no intention of putting back for the
-Breakwater.
-
-The boys had never been on an ocean steamer before, and would have been
-greatly delighted with their present experience had it not been for the
-feeling that every movement of the ponderous engine beneath them was
-taking them farther and farther from their homes.
-
-It would be impossible for their friends to hear from them for at least
-two days, and the news that the tug-boat had gone out to sea, and never
-returned, would probably reach Boontown very soon.
-
-All three were very much dejected when they thought of the misery and
-grief which the intelligence would cause in their families, and Phœnix
-seemed more downcast than either of the others.
-
-“If father believes I’m drowned,” he said, “it’ll be just his way to
-go about grieving that he worked me too hard. I know I made him think
-that, but I didn’t do so much after all.”
-
-“If my folks look at the thing in that light,” said Chap, “they’ll
-grieve that they didn’t get more out of me before I was drowned.”
-
-“I don’t believe there’ll be as much mourning as you think,” said Phil.
-“Uncle will be on hand, and he’s been in so many scrapes, and pulled
-through them all, that he knows just about how things will turn up. I
-bet it won’t be half an hour after he hears the news before he thinks
-out the whole thing, and has made all your people see that it’s as
-clear as daylight that we’ve been carried out to sea, and picked up by
-some steamer, and that we’ll be heard from soon after she gets to her
-port. He’ll know that there wasn’t storm enough to wreck a good, stout
-tug-boat, and that something must have got out of order, so that she
-was carried out to sea.”
-
-“If that one-masted schooner ever got in,” said Phœnix, “she’d let them
-know there was something wrong with us, for she must have seen or heard
-us blowing off steam.”
-
-“I don’t know about that,” said Chap, “for before I turned into my
-sick-bed, the vessel was pretty well out of sight. We were going in
-opposite directions, as well as I could make out.”
-
-“That was because she was sailing against the wind, and had to make
-long tacks,” said Phœnix.
-
-“Do you suppose I didn’t know that?” asked Chap, drawing himself up in
-such an erect position that a great lurch of the vessel nearly threw
-him off his feet.
-
-“We might as well make the best of it,” said Phil, “and have a good
-time. In a couple of days we will be in Savannah, and when we have
-telegraphed home, everybody’ll be all serene, if they are not now.”
-
-“Your head’s level, Phil,” said Chap. “Let’s go and explore the ship.”
-
-On the breezy deck of the steamer, none of the boys felt in the least
-degree sea-sick, and they went about in high spirits. The purser, a
-good-natured man, took them in charge, and showed them the engine-room
-and various parts of the vessel, but it was not long before he gave
-them a piece of information which nearly took their breath away.
-
-In answer to an inquiry in regard to the time at which they might
-expect to reach Savannah, the purser told them that the vessel could
-not stop at that port at all. The captain of the tug-boat had been
-right in saying that this was a Savannah steamer, but she had been
-temporarily withdrawn from that line, and was now bound for Nassau, in
-the Bahamas.
-
-“When will we get there?” asked Chap. “Can we telegraph from Nassau?”
-
-“We shall reach Nassau in about four days,” said the purser, “but there
-is no cable from those islands. You will have to carry the news of your
-safety yourselves when we bring you back to New York.”
-
-“Can’t we send a letter?” asked Phil.
-
-“Not any sooner than you can come yourselves,” said the purser, “for we
-shall bring back the mail from Nassau to the United States.”
-
-“And how long will it be before you get back to New York?” asked Phil.
-
-“I don’t know just how long we shall lie at Nassau,” said the
-good-natured purser; “but I think it will be ten or twelve days before
-we are in New York again.”
-
-“Won’t we meet some ship that will take us back or carry a letter?”
-asked Phœnix.
-
-“I can’t say,” replied the purser. “The captain will do what he can
-for you, but I don’t know that he will have a chance of putting you
-on board a northern-bound steamer, or of sending news of you to your
-friends.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER III.
-
-“A CONTINENT BEFORE US.”
-
-
-It was very hard for the boys to get their spirits up after the news
-they had just heard.
-
-“Ten days before our folks hear from us!” ejaculated Phœnix. “That’s
-simply dreadful! They’ll give us up long before that time.”
-
-“We will find them all in black when we get back,” said Chap, with a
-doleful face.
-
-But even this gloomy prospect could not long depress the spirits of our
-young friends.
-
-By the next morning they were going about cheerfully, hoping and
-believing that something would soon turn up by which they could
-speedily get back to their friends, or, at least, send news of their
-safety.
-
-The weather was now fine, although it was so cool that they were
-obliged to wear their overcoats whenever they were on deck, and they
-could not help enjoying this unexpected sea voyage.
-
-They did not see much of the tug-boat people. These men lived forward
-with the crew of the steamer, while the boys ate and slept with the
-passengers.
-
-On the morning of the third day of their steamer trip, they met one of
-the tug-boat crew,--a man named Adam Guy. This man had been the only
-person on board the tug-boat to whom the boys had taken any particular
-fancy. He had been a sailor, had visited many parts of the world, and
-had a great deal to tell of his various experiences on the sea and
-land. He was a strong and wiry, but not very large, man; and, like
-many sailors, he wore little gold rings in his ears. His hair was thin
-and sandy, and hung in short curls at the back of his head. He had a
-pleasant smile, and appeared to be an easy-going, good-tempered fellow.
-
-“Young men,” said Adam, “I’ve been a-wantin’ to see you and have a
-little talk with you. Do you know there’s no chance of our meetin’ any
-vessels, or of your bein’ sent home or gettin’ any word back, either?”
-
-“How is that?” asked the boy.
-
-“Why, it’s just this. We’re out of the way now of all craft bound
-north. I did think we might a’ met a coast steamer yesterday or the
-day before; but if we did, we passed them in the night, for I didn’t
-see any. We are now off the coast of Florida, and as we are sailin’
-south, we keep pretty well in shore, so as to be out of the way of the
-Gulf Stream, which runs northward, you know; and, as you’ve lived on a
-big river, you understand what it is to sail agin a strong tide. But,
-of course, every vessel bound north tries to keep in the current of
-the Gulf Stream, so’s to be helped along. So, just about here, where
-the Gulf Stream is near our coast, you find all vessels, goin’ south,
-keepin’ pretty near shore, and them bound north, far out. It won’t be
-long before we’re near enough to the coast for you to see the trees.
-And we’ll run down till we git about opposite Jupiter light, and then
-we’ll sail across the stream and make straight for the Bahamas. I know
-all about these waters, for I’ve sailed in them often. Now, as for me,
-I don’t want to go to Nassau, and I don’t believe you want to, either.
-The captain of our tug and the rest of our men are all willin’ to go,
-and ship on this steamer for their home trip. They’ll be short o’ hands
-then, for some of the crew are to be discharged at Nassau, but I don’t
-want to go to that old English town. I’ve been there, and I’ve had
-enough of it.”
-
-“But what are we going to do?” asked Phil. “We can’t jump overboard and
-swim ashore.”
-
-“No,” said Adam, “we can’t do that, but I’ve a plan in my head. Before
-we git to Jupiter light, the water is so deep near the coast that
-steamers often run in very close. Now, if the captain would lie-to
-there and send you fellers and me ashore in a boat, it would be the
-best thing he could do for us.”
-
-“What would we do when we got there?” asked the boys.
-
-“Do?” said Adam. “Why we’d all go North, and lose no time about it,
-instead of goin’ over to the Bahamas and stayin’ there, I don’t know
-how long, and then takin’ a week for the home trip. Just back of the
-coast-line, down there, is the Indian River, and sometimes it’s not
-much more’n a stone’s throw from the beach. If we could be landed, we
-could easily git over to that, and there we’d find a craft to take us
-up to Titusville, and from that place we’d easy git over to the St.
-John’s River, and then you boys could telegraph home. I’ve travelled
-all through that part of Florida, and I could take you along as
-straight as a bee-line. There are settlements here and there on the
-Indian River, and you needn’t be afraid but we’ll be taken good care of
-till we git to Titusville. After that it’ll be all plain sailin’.”
-
-“I’d like that plan first-rate,” said Chap.
-
-“And so would I!” cried both of the other boys.
-
-“But do you think the captain would stop,” asked Phil, “and put us off?”
-
-“That’s what’s got to be found out,” said Adam. “If I was you fellers
-I’d just go to him and ask about it. Lay the p’ints before him strong,
-and let him know how much you want to send word to your friends where
-you are, and then to git along home as quick as possible. Tell him I’ll
-go along with you and pilot you through all straight.”
-
-The boys agreed that this plan was a capital one, and, after a little
-consultation, they decided to go and talk to the captain about it, and
-make Phil the spokesman.
-
-At first, the captain did not take very kindly to the proposition. He
-did not wish to lose time, nor to incur the trouble and risk of sending
-a boat on shore. He also knew that a great part of the coast of Florida
-was nothing but a barren waste, and he did not think it would be any
-great kindness to the persons he had saved from drowning to put them on
-shore to suffer from exposure and privation. But, on the other hand, if
-the boys were landed in Florida, they would be at least in their own
-country, and ought to be able to communicate with their friends much
-sooner than if he took them along with him to the foreign islands to
-which he was bound.
-
-“You would need money,” he said, “after you get ashore, for you
-couldn’t expect the people there to take care of you, and carry you
-about free of charge; and, although I am willing to give you a berth
-here, I can’t supply you with cash for a land trip.”
-
-“I have some money,” said Phil, “though not very much.”
-
-“And I’ve got----” said Chap, thrusting his hands into his pocket.
-
-“Oh, there’s plenty of money,” interrupted Phœnix. “There need be no
-trouble about that.”
-
-“Well, then,” said the captain, who was beginning to see some sense in
-the proposition of the boys, “one difficulty is removed. Suppose you go
-forward and send that man you spoke of to me.”
-
-The captain had a long conversation with Adam, and convinced himself
-that that individual knew what he was talking about when he proposed
-his plan. The captain of the tug-boat was called in, and Adam’s
-trustworthiness seemed well established.
-
-After consultation with some of the other officers, it was decided
-to put the boys and Adam Guy ashore when a suitable place should be
-reached. The news created considerable excitement among the passengers,
-and great interest was taken in the proposed landing of the boys.
-
-The air in these semi-tropical waters was warm and balmy, and the sea
-was smooth. Everything seemed favorable for going on shore. About four
-o’clock in the afternoon the ship lay to about half a mile from a
-broad, sandy beach. This locality Adam declared he knew very well.
-
-The Indian River, he said, lay but a short distance back, behind a
-narrow forest of palmettos; and at the distance of a mile or two there
-was a house on the river bank, where shelter could be obtained until
-they could get transportation up the river.
-
-The captain, however, took care that the little party should not
-suffer in case they did not reach shelter as soon as they expected. He
-provided them with provisions suitable for two days, put up in four
-convenient packages. Each carried a canteen of fresh water, and Adam
-took charge of a large tarpaulin, rolled up into a compact bundle,
-which could be used as a protection in case of rain. The weather was
-so mild that their overcoats would be sufficient to keep them warm at
-night.
-
-While the men were preparing to lower a boat, Phil took Phœnix aside,
-and asked him what he meant by saying there was plenty of money.
-
-“Chap has only three dollars,” he said, “and I haven’t that much.”
-
-“I have fifty dollars,” said Phœnix, “and I guess that will take us
-along till we can telegraph for more.”
-
-“How did you come to have that much?” asked Phil, with surprise.
-
-“Why, you see, our folks haven’t settled what is to be done with some
-money I got for helping to run the ‘Thomas Wistar’ ashore, and father
-is taking care of it. But I made up my mind that I was going to keep
-hold of some of it myself. A fellow likes to feel that he has got
-something of his own that he can lay hands on, no matter what is done
-with the general pile. So I locked up fifty dollars in my room, and
-when we started off, I didn’t want to leave it behind, for I didn’t
-know but the house might burn down. So I put it in an old money-belt
-father used to wear, and it’s strapped around me now.”
-
-“You’re a gay old fellow!” said Chap, who had come up and heard this.
-“You are always turning up at the right time.”
-
-“And right side up,” said Phil.
-
-A few minutes after this, a large boat, pulled by four men, and
-containing Adam Guy and our three friends, was leaving the side of the
-steamer, followed by the cheers of the passengers, who had assembled on
-the decks to bid the little party farewell.
-
-The sea was quiet, with the exception of a long and gentle swell, and
-the first part of the little trip seemed like rowing on a river. But
-when they neared the shore and saw the long lines of surf rolling
-in front of them, the boys began to feel a little uneasy. This was
-something entirely novel to them, and, although they were not exactly
-afraid, they could not say that they felt altogether comfortable at the
-idea of going through these roaring breakers.
-
-But the surf at this point was not really very high, and the boat was
-a metallic one, with air compartments at each end, and the men rowed
-steadily on, appearing to have no more fears of the breakers than of
-the open sea.
-
-As the boat reached the first line of surf and was lifted up and
-carried swiftly forward on its great back, and then dropped into a
-watery hollow, to be raised again by another wave and carried still
-farther on, our boys held tightly to the sides of the boat as if they
-felt they must stick to that craft, whatever happened. But the men
-pulled steadily on, keeping the boat’s head straight for the shore.
-
-The breakers came rolling on behind as if they would sweep over the
-boat and cover her up with their dark green water, but another wave
-seemed always underneath to carry her on beyond the reach of the one
-which followed, and it was not long before, by the aid of oars and the
-incoming surf, they gained the beach.
-
-Before the wave which had carried them in began to recede, Adam and
-another man jumped into the water and pulled the boat well up on the
-sands.
-
-Then the whole party disembarked, Chap jumping into water ankle-deep,
-and giving a shout that might have been heard on the steamer.
-
-As soon as the boys’ valises and the other traps had been put ashore,
-the boat was turned about, and, with Adam’s help, was launched into the
-surf.
-
-The pull back through the breakers was harder than the coming in, but
-the four men knew their business, and the stanch life-boat easily
-breasted every line of surf.
-
-In five minutes they were out in smooth water and pulling hard for the
-steamer. As soon as they reached it the boat was hauled up, the vessel
-was put about, and with a farewell blast from her steam-whistle, she
-proceeded on her way.
-
-“Hurrah!” cried Chap, waving his cap over his head. “Now I feel that we
-are really our own masters, and that we’re going to have the rarest old
-time we’ve ever known. Boys, the whole continent is before us!”
-
-“That’s the trouble of it,” said Phil. “If there wasn’t quite so much
-continent before us we might expect to get home sooner.”
-
-“Trouble? Home?” cried Chap. “Don’t let anybody mention such things to
-me. I’m gayer than the larkiest lark that ever flapped himself aloft!”
-
-And, with these words, he ran to the top of a little sand hillock to
-see as much of the continent as he could.
-
-“If I were you fellers,” said Adam, “I’d make that young man captain.
-You’ll never be able to manage him if you don’t let him go ahead.”
-
-“Good!” said Phil; “let’s make him captain, and you, Phœnix, ought to
-be treasurer, for you carry the funds.”
-
-“And what’ll you be?” asked Phœnix.
-
-“You’re mixin’ up your officers,” said Adam; “but as a party of this
-kind is a little out of the general run, I guess it won’t matter.
-As this is a land expedition,” he said to Phil, “you might be
-quartermaster, and I’ll be private.”
-
-“All right!” cried the boys.
-
-And when Chap came running down from the sand-hill he was informed of
-the high position to which he had been chosen.
-
-“My friends,” cried Chap, drawing himself up and clapping his breast
-with his hand, “you do me honor, and I’ll lead you--I’ll lead you----”
-
-“Into no end of scrapes,” suggested Phil.
-
-“Perhaps you’re right. That may be so. But you’re bound to follow,”
-said Captain Chap.
-
-“He’ll lead you sure enough,” laughed Adam. And then he added
-to himself, forgetting that this was a land, and not a nautical
-expedition, “I’ll keep my hand upon the tiller.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IV.
-
-WITH HOOK AND LINE.
-
-
-After standing for a few moments to take a last look at the steamer,
-which was now rapidly making her way southward, our party prepared to
-take up the shortest line of march for the Indian River.
-
-The boys slung their overcoats and valises over their shoulders, and
-these, with their water-canteens and provisions, made for each of them
-a pretty good load. But Adam had a still heavier burden, for he carried
-the roll of tarpaulin in addition to his other traps.
-
-“I am not captain,” said Adam, addressing Chap, “but I’ll go ahead, for
-I’ll be able to find my way over to the river better than you will.”
-
-“All right,” said Chap. “Adam was the first man, and you can take the
-lead. But I am captain, for all that, and I expect to be obeyed.”
-
-“Expect away,” said Phil; “it’ll keep your mind busy, and stop you from
-making plans for blowing us all up North in one bang.”
-
-“Silence!” cried Chap. “Forward, march!”
-
-The way from the beach back to the river was a very hard one, and a
-good deal longer than Adam had expected it to be.
-
-For a time they walked over loose, soft sand, which was piled into
-little hills by the wind, then they came to a thick growth of
-palmetto-trees, the ground being covered with underbrush of the
-most disagreeable kind, consisting mainly of a low bush, called the
-“saw-palmetto,” which was made up of leaves three or four feet long,
-with sharp teeth at each edge.
-
-A variety of tangled vines, concealing rotten palmetto stumps, of
-all sizes, helped to make the walking exceedingly difficult. But
-some man or animal had been that way before, and through the almost
-undistinguishable path, which Adam seemed to scent out, rather than to
-see, the party slowly made its way.
-
-When at last they reached the river, the boys gave a great shout, but
-Adam merely grinned, and looked anxiously up and down.
-
-The broad, smooth waters of the Indian River spread before the
-delighted eyes of our young friends. Large birds were flying through
-the air. At a little distance hundreds of ducks were swimming on the
-water. The low shores were green and beautiful. But what Adam looked
-for was not there.
-
-As far as the eye could reach--and as the river here bent away from
-them on either hand, they could see the bank on which they stood for a
-long distance up and down--not a house, or clearing, or sign of human
-habitation, could be seen, and on the river there was not a sail or
-boat.
-
-“I haven’t struck just the place I want to get to,” said Adam, “for the
-house I’m after is just above this bend where the river turns due north
-agen; but then it couldn’t be expected I’d pick out the very place I
-wanted when I was on board a steamer nearly a mile from shore. If I
-could ’a’ seen the river, I’d been all right, but beaches is pretty
-much alike.”
-
-“I think you did very well,” said Phil, “to get so near the place. The
-end of that bend can’t be so very far away.”
-
-“It wouldn’t be much of a walk,” said Adam, “if there was a good beach
-at the side of the river. There’s a sandy shore on the other side, as
-you can see, but that’s no good to us. Along here, for pretty much the
-whole bend, you see the trees and underbrush grow right down to the
-water, and it would be wadin’ and sloppin’, as well as scratchin’.”
-
-“We might keep farther in shore,” said Chap, “where we could find dry
-walking.”
-
-“It would be dry enough, but it would be mighty slow,” said Adam. “The
-best and quickest thing we can do is to get right back to the beach.
-There we’ll find good, hard walkin’, and we can tramp along lively till
-we calkilate we’re about opposite John Brewer’s place, and then we can
-push through agen to the river.”
-
-“I guess that’s about the best thing to do,” said Phil, “for it will
-give us less of this horrid jungle-scratching than trying to push right
-straight along through the woods.”
-
-“All right!” cried Chap. “Backward! March!”
-
-And again, with Adam at the head, the party pushed through the strip of
-woods which separated the river from the ocean-beach. The march along
-the sand was easy enough, but it seemed very long.
-
-“Why, I thought,” cried Chap, “that it was only a little way to the end
-of that bend!”
-
-“It’s further than it looks,” said Adam. “I’ve got a pretty good notion
-how fur we ought to walk before we strike across; but it won’t be long
-before we try the woods agen.”
-
-In about ten minutes, Adam turned, and led the way toward the river.
-The strip of land was much narrower here than where they had crossed
-it before, and after a short season of scrambling and scratching
-and pushing over ground where it seemed as if no one had ever passed
-before, the river was reached. Here was a broad strip of clean sand
-lying between the woods and the water’s edge, but there was no house in
-sight.
-
-“Isn’t this the end of the bend?” asked Phœnix.
-
-“Yes, it’s the end of the bend,” said Adam, looking about him; “but
-it’s the wrong bend. I know the place now just as well as if I’d been
-born here. You see the river makes another bend up there, don’t you?
-It’s a good while since I’ve been here, and I never came to the place
-by the way of the sea. The house we’re after is up there. There’s no
-mistake this time.”
-
-“But that must be ever so far away!” said Phil, dolefully. “The
-beginning of that bend is more than a mile off, I should say.”
-
-“Yes, it’s a good piece off,” said Adam, “and I don’t believe we’d
-better try to make it to-night. The best thing we can do is to camp
-just here.”
-
-At this the boys gave a cheer.
-
-“That’s splendid!” said Chap. “I’d rather camp out than go to fifty
-houses!”
-
-And, casting his traps on the ground, he called on all hands to go and
-put up the tent.
-
-“You needn’t be in such a hurry about the tent,” said Adam. “That’s the
-easiest thing we have to do. After awhile me and one of you will fix
-up the tarpaulin between a couple of trees back here, and as it isn’t
-likely to rain, that’ll be all the shelter we’ll want. But the first
-thing to do is to get supper. Have any of you got fishin’-lines?”
-
-Each of the boys declared he had one, and started to get it out of his
-valise.
-
-“Two’ll be enough,” said Adam. “One of you might stay and help me with
-the fire and things, while the other two go and fish.”
-
-Phœnix agreed to stay and help Adam, while Phil and Chap got out their
-lines.
-
-“I was afraid your hooks wouldn’t be big enough,” said Adam, taking up
-their lines; “but this is a regular deep-sea tackle.”
-
-“Yes; my uncle gave us the lines,” said Phil. “He thought we might get
-some fishing down at the Breakwater.”
-
-“Well, all you got to do,” said Adam, “is to go down to the beach and
-throw out your lines as fur as they will go. We’ll have to bait at
-first with a little piece of meat from the rations the captain gave us.
-Of course, you needn’t fish if you don’t want to. We’ve got enough to
-eat, but I thought it would seem more to you like real campin’ out if
-we had a mess of nice hot fish for supper.”
-
-“That’s so!” cried Chap; “we wouldn’t think of eating that dry stuff
-while there’s fish in the river.”
-
-“That is, if we can coax any of the fish out of the river,” remarked
-Phil.
-
-“Oh, we’ll do that easy enough,” said Chap. “Get your bait, and come
-along.”
-
-The two boys proceeded a short distance from their proposed
-camping-ground, and having baited their hooks with some fat and rather
-gristly beef, they proceeded to throw out their lines; but as they were
-not used to this kind of fishing, neither of them succeeded in getting
-his line out into deep water.
-
-Adam had been watching them, and seeing that they were making out
-badly, he came down to give them what he called “a start.” He unwound
-the whole of each line, and carefully laid it in coils on the sand.
-Holding the shore end of the line firmly in his left hand, he swung the
-hook and heavy lead several times above his head, and let it go. The
-long line flew out its full length, and the lead and bait plunged into
-deep water. When each of the lines had been thus put out, he went back
-to his own work.
-
-It was not long before the boys began to have bites, and in a few
-minutes Chap commenced hauling in his line like a house a-fire.
-Hand-over-hand he grasped and jerked the cord, throwing it wildly to
-each side of him as he violently pulled it in. In a moment he drew a
-fish out of the water, and threw it up high on the sand. Rushing to
-it, he picked it up, and held it in the air.
-
-“Look at that!” he cried to Phil. “A splendid fellow! It must be nearly
-a foot long.”
-
-Phœnix and Phil were both interested in the first fish caught in
-Florida waters, and they ran to look at it. Adam, also, who was picking
-up driftwood near by, came to see Chap’s prize.
-
-“It will do for bait,” he said, as he took the fish from the hook.
-
-“Bait!” cried Chap, in amazement. “A big, fat fish like that for bait!”
-
-Adam laughed.
-
-“A fish like that isn’t called a big one in these parts, though I
-s’pose in your waters it would be a pretty good ketch. It’s a mullet,
-and good enough eatin’, though it isn’t big enough for a meal for us,
-and I only want to cook one fish.”
-
-“All right!” said Chap. “If there are fish big enough for you in this
-river, I’ll catch them.”
-
-The mullet was killed, and both lines baited with a large piece of
-its flesh; for it was food much more attractive to the big fish they
-wanted, Adam said, than the cold meat they had used before. Phil
-went farther down the river, and both boys put out their own lines
-this time, succeeding, after several attempts, in throwing them a
-considerable distance from the shore.
-
-In less than two minutes Chap felt a tug at his line. He gave a pull,
-and his first impression was that his hook had caught in something at
-the bottom, but the jerking of his line soon let him know that there
-was a fish at the other end of it. Then he began to haul in; but this
-hauling in was very different from anything he had been accustomed to.
-
-It took all his strength to pull in the line hand-over-hand, and
-although he was greatly excited, and worked as fast as he could, it
-came in but slowly. Sometimes the fish pulled back so hard that Chap
-thought he would be dragged into the water himself; but, digging his
-heels into the sand, he tugged away manfully.
-
-The line was a stout one, but it cut his hands, and his arms began to
-ache from the unaccustomed exercise. But he kept bravely on until the
-head and back of a great fish appeared above the surface of the water.
-
-Wildly excited, he gave a few mad pulls, and then rushing backward, he
-hauled high up in the sand a flapping, floundering fish, nearly three
-feet long. It was a handsome creature, dark on the back, but bright
-yellow beneath.
-
-For a moment Chap gazed on his prize with triumphant delight, and then
-he gave a shout, which brought Phœnix, and soon after, Adam.
-
-Phœnix was almost as delighted as Chap himself. This was something
-like fishing. He had never seen a fish like this in his life.
-
-“Now, then,” cried Chap to Adam, “what do you say to that? Is that
-fellow big enough for you?”
-
-“Yes,” said Adam, “it’s big enough, and it’s too big. That’s a cavalio,
-and people eat them when they can’t get anything else; but its flesh is
-pretty coarse, and I couldn’t manage to cook a fish that size the way
-I’m goin’ to do it.”
-
-“You ought to mention the exact size of fish you want,” said Chap, in
-a disappointed tone, “and then, perhaps, a fellow could catch them for
-you.”
-
-“It is a pity you didn’t get something between the two,” said Adam;
-“but you can’t expect to hit anything right square the first time.
-But, hello! here comes the quartermaster, and I believe he’s got a
-blue-fish.”
-
-Phil now came running up, carrying a fish nearly as long as his arm.
-As he came near, he raised the flapping fish, whose tail had been
-dragging in the sand, and gave a shout; but when he saw the magnificent
-creature, which was still plunging and rolling at the end of the line
-which Chap held firmly in his hand, his countenance fell.
-
-“What a whopper!” he cried. “Why, mine is nothing to it!”
-
-“No,” said Adam, “but yours is a blue-fish, and we’ll have him for
-supper. Don’t be cast down, captain; you’ll have plenty of chances yet
-for blue-fish, bass, and lots of other good fellers. I’ll take the hook
-out of this young elephant of your’n, as he might snap your fingers,
-and then we’ll shove him into the water. He looks lively enough to come
-to all right when he gets into salt water agen, and there’s no use in
-lettin’ fish die here if you ain’t goin’ to use ’em.”
-
-“All right!” said Chap. “I’m captain, and it was my duty to catch the
-biggest fish, and I’ve done it. And now the quicker we cook this little
-fellow for supper, the better, for I’m dreadfully hungry.”
-
-The “little fellow,” a fish nearly two feet long, was taken in charge
-by Adam, and carried to the camp-ground, where a large fire was already
-blazing.
-
-“It was havin’ this paper along,” said Adam, “that put it into my head
-to try baked fish for supper.”
-
-Having dressed the fish, Adam rolled it in the brown paper, and pushing
-away a portion of the fire, he scooped out a place in the warm sand
-and ashes, and covered up the fish therein. Then the fire was built up
-again, and was allowed to blaze away until Adam thought his fish was
-done.
-
-When the brown paper was removed, the skin of the blue-fish came off
-with it, leaving the white flesh perfectly baked and temptingly hot.
-
-There was salt and pepper among their rations, and with the fish and
-the bread and butter and biscuits, the boys and Adam made a splendid
-meal, although they had nothing to drink with it but the water from
-their canteens.
-
-“The way to make a tip-top meal off of fish,” said Chap, “is to catch
-it yourself--or else let some other fellow do it.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER V.
-
-CHAP’S ALLIGATOR.
-
-
-The preparations for the night were very simple. Adam, whose previous
-experience in camping and rough life had made him think, before leaving
-the steamer, of a good many little things that might be useful on a
-journey such as the one proposed, had brought with him a long, thin
-rope, something like a clothes-line.
-
-“There’s nothin’ like havin’ plenty of line along,” he said, as he
-fastened one end of this to a low branch of a tree. “It always comes in
-useful. I’m goin’ to hang the tarpaulin on this, and make a tent of it.”
-
-“The rope is long enough,” said Phœnix.
-
-“Yes,” said Adam; “but you can’t have a rope too long. The nearest tree
-that ’twould do to tie it to might be a hundred feet away, don’t you
-see?”
-
-There was a suitable tree, however, not a dozen feet from the one just
-mentioned, and to a low branch of this Adam made his line fast, tying
-it in a slip-knot, and coiling the slack rope on the ground. This
-proceeding was made the text of another sermon from the prudent sailor.
-
-“Never cut a line, if you can help it,” he said. “Use what you want,
-and coil away the slack. The time will come when you’ll want the
-longest line you can get.”
-
-The tarpaulin was thrown over the low rope, and its edges held out by
-cords and pegs, which Adam had prepared while the supper was being
-cooked.
-
-“It’ll be pretty close quarters,” he said, looking into the little
-tent, “but you fellers can squeeze into it, and I can sleep outside
-as well as not. The sand is as dry as a chip, and if you put on your
-overcoats, and take your carpet-bags for pillows, you’ll be just as
-comfortable as if you was at home in your feather beds.”
-
-“A good deal more so, I should think,” said Phil, “in mild weather like
-this.”
-
-The boys would not allow Adam to sleep outside. As the tarpaulin was
-arranged, if there was room enough for three, there was room enough for
-four. The tent was open at both ends, and they lay in pairs, with their
-feet inside and their heads near the open ends, so as to get plenty of
-air.
-
-Adam was soon asleep, but the boys did not close their eyes for
-some time. The novelty of the situation as they thus lay on the soft
-dry sand, with the tropical foliage all around them, the broad river
-rippling but a short distance away, and the darkness of this night
-in an almost foreign land, relieved only by the flashes of the dying
-camp-fire and the bright stars in the clear sky, kept them awake.
-
-Far off in the river they heard, every now and then, a dull pounding
-noise, as if some one were thumping at the door of a house. This, Adam
-told them before he went to sleep, was caused by the drum-fish, who
-make these loud sounds as they swim near the bottom of the river.
-
-Now and then they heard a distant snort or roar, but from what sort of
-animal it came they did not know. They were aware that in the woods of
-Florida there were panthers, bears, and wild-cats; but Adam had told
-them that in this part of the country these animals were very shy and
-seldom disturbed any one if not disturbed themselves.
-
-After a time Phil and Phœnix fell asleep, but Chap did not close his
-eyes. He was an excitable fellow, and he was thinking what he should
-do if a wild beast should invade their camp. There were no firearms in
-the party, but he thought of several ways in which four active persons
-could seize a wild-cat, for instance, and hold it so that it could harm
-no one of them.
-
-After a time the moon rose, and then Chap, lying with his face turned
-toward the river, was fascinated by the strange beauty of the scene.
-
-While gazing thus, he saw two small animals slowly creeping across the
-sand and approaching the tent. The sight of them startled him, and he
-was about to give an alarm, when he suddenly checked himself. These
-could not be wild-cats, he thought; they were too little and their
-movements too slow.
-
-As they came nearer and turned their heads toward him, he saw by the
-now bright rays of the moon that they had light triangular faces, gray
-bodies, and rat-like tails, and that they were opossums. He had seen
-these animals in the North, and laughed quietly when he thought they
-had frightened him. They were evidently after some pieces of fish
-which lay near the dead ashes of the camp-fire, and were soon making a
-comfortable meal.
-
-“I never saw such tame creatures,” thought Chap. “They must know there
-are people about.”
-
-Then he gave a low, soft whistle. The opossums looked up, but did not
-move. There was a piece of stick within reach of his hand, and picking
-it up, he whirled it toward them. They looked up again, but still did
-not move.
-
-Slowly drawing himself out of the tent so as not to disturb the others,
-Chap rose to his feet and approached the opossums. One of them turned
-and ambled slowly to a short distance, but the other stood still.
-
-Chap walked close up to him, but the creature merely arched its back
-and looked at him.
-
-Picking up a stick which was lying near the ashes, Chap gave the stupid
-creature a little punch. The opossum merely twisted itself up a little
-and opened its mouth.
-
-“Upon my word!” said Chap; “if you are not the tamest wild beasts in
-the world! I don’t believe either of you ever saw a man before, and
-don’t know that you ought to be afraid of him. But I’m not going to
-hurt a non-resistant. You can go ahead and eat your supper, for all I
-care.”
-
-And so he slipped quietly back into the tent, and left the opossums to
-continue their meal.
-
-It might have been supposed that when Chap did close his eyes, he would
-sleep longer than the others, but this was not the case. Either because
-he did not rest well in a new place, or because his mind was disturbed
-by his responsibilities as captain of the party, he awoke before any of
-the others. It was broad daylight, and again he slipped out of the tent
-without disturbing any of his companions.
-
-The opossums were gone, and Chap walked along the water’s edge, looking
-at the hosts of birds which were flying above him. There were gulls
-and many others which he did not know, and near the other side of the
-river was a small flock of very large birds, which he supposed must be
-pelicans.
-
-As he walked round the little clump of trees, under which the tent was
-pitched, he saw upon the sand, near the water’s edge, something which
-made his heart jump.
-
-It was an alligator, the first Chap had ever seen out of a menagerie.
-It was about eight feet long, and was lying in the sunshine, with its
-head toward the water.
-
-Chap stood and gazed at it with mingled amazement and delight. He never
-thought of fear, for he knew an alligator would not come after him.
-
-Slowly and gradually he came nearer and nearer the strange creature. It
-did not move. Was it dead? or asleep? He felt sure it was the latter,
-for it did not look dead. What a splendid thing it was to be so near
-a live alligator on its native sands! If there were only some way of
-catching it! That was almost too glorious to think of. If he had a
-rifle he might shoot it; but that would be nothing. But to catch it
-alive! The idea fired his soul. He would give anything to capture this
-fellow, but how could he do it?
-
-He remembered the account that had so pleased him, when he was a boy,
-of the English captain--Waterton, he thought his name was--who sprang
-astride of an alligator, and seizing its forepaws, twisted them over
-its back so that the creature could not walk, nor reach its captor
-with its jaws or tail.
-
-At first Chap thought that he might possibly do this, but he saw it
-would be a risky business. The alligator’s paws looked very strong, and
-he might not be able to hold them above its back. Even if it got one
-paw loose, it might turn round and make things lively.
-
-“If I could only get a rope round the end of his tail,” thought Chap,
-“I could tie him to a tree. That would be simply splendid!”
-
-This plan really looked more feasible than any other. The alligator
-was lying with his tail turned a little to the left, and the end of
-it raised slightly from the sand. It might be possible to slip a rope
-around this without waking the creature; but where was the rope? Chap
-racked his brain for an instant. Had they a rope?
-
-Then he remembered the line that supported the tent. There was ever so
-much of it coiled on the sand, it was already fastened to a tree. If
-the loose length would reach the alligator, and if he could get the end
-of it around his tail, and the line was strong enough to hold him, he
-would have him sure.
-
-Wouldn’t it be glorious to wake up the other fellows and show them the
-captive alligator which he had caught all by himself while they were
-fast asleep?
-
-Slipping off his shoes, he stole softly around to the foot of the tree
-by the tent where the coil of rope lay. Taking the loose end in his
-hand, he turned, and slowly crept toward the alligator.
-
-The creature was asleep, and Chap made so little noise as he gradually
-came near it, that its repose was not disturbed. To his great joy, Chap
-found that the rope was long enough. When he was almost near enough
-to touch the tip and of the alligator’s tail, he kneeled on one knee,
-ready to spring up in an instant if the creature should awake, and
-hesitated for a moment before proceeding to attach the rope.
-
-If he tried to tie it on, the alligator might move before he had time
-to make a good knot. It would be better to prepare a slip-noose, and
-put that over the end of his tail. Then when he moved or jerked, he
-would pull the rope tight.
-
-Chap made a slip-knot and a noose, and, with quickly-beating heart, he
-leaned forward, and with both hands he gently put the open noose around
-the alligator’s tail.
-
-He did this so cautiously and carefully that the rope did not touch the
-creature until it was seven or eight inches above the tip of the tail.
-Then he gently pulled it so as to tighten it.
-
-Almost at the first moment that the rope touched the alligator it gave
-its tail a little twitch. Chap sprang to his feet and ran backward
-several yards. Then the alligator raised its head, looked back, and saw
-him.
-
-Without a moment’s hesitation the creature lifted itself on its short
-legs and made for the river. Chap trembled with the excitement of the
-moment. Would the noose slip off? Would the rope hold?
-
-The noose did not slip off, it tightened; and in a moment the rope was
-stretched to its utmost length.
-
-Chap was about to give a shout of triumph, when the alligator, feeling
-a tug on his tail, became panic-stricken and bolted wildly for the
-water.
-
-The rope, though not heavy, was a strong one, and it did not break, but
-the slip-knot around the nearest tree to which it was tied was pulled
-loose in an instant, and down came the tent on the sleepers beneath it.
-
-Then there was a tremendous jerk on the branch to which the extreme end
-was tied, and in an instant it was torn from the trunk of the tree.
-
-This branch caught in the end of the tarpaulin, the pegs were jerked
-out of the sand, and the whole tent was hauled roughly and swiftly over
-the recumbent Adam and the two boys. The branch got under Phil’s head
-and jerked him into a sitting position almost before it woke him up.
-
-Phœnix thought an earthquake had occurred. In an instant he was
-enveloped in darkness; then there seemed to be a land slide over his
-head, and flying bits of wood banged about his ears.
-
-Adam made a grab at the tarpaulin as it swept over him, and held fast
-to one corner of it. He was instantly jerked about three yards along
-the sand, and then the branch, to which the end of the rope was tied,
-slipped under the tarpaulin, and Adam and the tent were left lying
-together on the ground.
-
-Chap made a wild rush after the branch, but it was pulled into the
-water before he could reach it. He could see it floating rapidly along
-the top of the water, as the alligator swam away, and he stood sadly on
-the bank, watching the disappearance of that branch and his hopes.
-
-Adam, with the two boys, now appeared, half awake and utterly
-astounded, and anxiously demanded to know what had happened. Never had
-they been awakened in such a startling style. When Chap explained the
-state of affairs, Phil and Phœnix burst into a laugh, but Adam looked
-rather glum.
-
-“You don’t mean to say,” he exclaimed, “that that ’gator has gone off
-with all my rope?”
-
-“He’s got it all,” said Chap; “and I’m sorry now it didn’t break, so
-some of it might have been left. But I tell you what we could do, if
-we could only get a boat; we could run after that branch--it won’t
-sink, you know--and when we got hold of the rope we might haul the
-alligator in.”
-
-“Haul him in!” cried Adam; “I’d like to see myself hauling a live
-alligator into a boat, even if we could do it, and had a boat. No, that
-line is gone for good. He’s turned round and chawed it off his tail by
-this time.”
-
-“What did you expect to do with your alligator,” asked Phil, “after you
-had fastened him to a tree? We haven’t anything to kill him with, and
-he would have raged around at the end of his line like a mad bull.”
-
-“Perhaps Chap thought he could tame it, and take it along with us,”
-said Phœnix.
-
-“Look here, boys,” said Chap, “I don’t want any criticisms on this
-alligator business. If I’d been acting as your captain, and leading you
-in an alligator hunt, you might say what you pleased when the beast got
-away; but I was doing this thing in my private capacity, and not as
-commander of the party, and you fellows have nothing to do with it.”
-
-“Haven’t we?” cried Phil. “When my head was nearly jerked off, and
-three or four yards of tent hauled over my face?”
-
-“And I was scared worse than if I had been pulled out of bed with a
-rake?” said Phœnix.
-
-“Nothin’ to do with it!” exclaimed Adam. “When my rope was jerked out
-of sight and hearin’ in a minute, and the tarpaulin would ’a’ gone with
-it, if I hadn’t grabbed it? I should think we had something to do with
-it.”
-
-“Perhaps you had,” said Chap, as he sat down on the sand to put on his
-shoes. “But I tell you what it is, fellows,” he added, with sparkling
-eyes, “if we could have tied a live alligator to a tree, it would have
-been a splendid thing to tell when we got home.”
-
-“There is people,” said Adam, dryly, “who’d tell a story like that
-without tyin’ a ’gator to a tree.”
-
-“But we are not that kind,” promptly answered Captain Chap.
-
-“But I guess we won’t cry over spilt milk, or lost ropes, either,” said
-Adam; “and the best thing we kin do is to get along to John Brewer’s
-house and see about some breakfast.”
-
-“We might catch some more fish,” said Chap, “and have breakfast before
-we started.”
-
-“If you kin ketch some coffee,” said Adam, “I’ll be willin’ to talk
-about breakfast here; but I don’t want to make another meal off fish
-and warm water, if I can help it. John Brewer’s house is just the other
-side of that bend, and we’ll be there in half an hour.”
-
-The tarpaulin was rolled up, each of the party picked up his
-individual traps, and, headed by Chap, they were soon walking along the
-shore of the river.
-
-When they turned the bend above, they were delighted to see that Adam
-was right, and that John Brewer’s house was really there. It was not
-much of a house, for it was a frame building, one story high, and
-containing three or four rooms; but it had an air of human habitation
-about it which was very welcome to the wanderers. It stood in a small
-clearing, and John Brewer, a little man, with long, brown hair, which
-looked as if the wind had been blowing it in several directions during
-the night, came out of his front door to meet them. Two of his children
-followed him, and the three others and his wife looked out of a
-half-opened window.
-
-Mr. Brewer was mildly surprised to see his old acquaintance, Adam, and
-the three boys, and when he had heard their story, he took a kind but
-languid interest in the matter, and went into the house to see about
-getting breakfast.
-
-It was not long before our friends were sitting down to a plentiful
-meal of coffee, corn-bread, and very tough bacon, Mr. Brewer and his
-family standing at the end of the table and gazing at them as they
-ate. Some of them would have joined the breakfast-party had there been
-plates and cups enough.
-
-About half an hour after breakfast, as our friends, with Mr. Brewer
-and four of the children, were sitting in the shade in front of the
-house, and Mrs. Brewer and the other child were looking at them behind
-a half-opened window-shutter, Adam remarked,--
-
-“What I want to know is what chance we have of gettin’ up the river to
-Titusville?”
-
-“How did you expect to get up?” asked Mr. Brewer.
-
-“Well,” said Adam, “I thought we might get passage in a mail-boat,
-if one happened to come along at the right time; and if it didn’t, I
-thought there’d be some boat or other goin’ up the river to-day that
-would take us.”
-
-“Well, if them’s your kalkerlations,” said Mr. Brewer, gently rubbing
-his knees and looking out over the water, “I don’t think you’re going
-to get up at all.”
-
-“Not get up at all!” cried the boys; and Adam looked puzzled.
-
-“Well, not for a week or so, anyway,” said Mr. Brewer, his eyes still
-fixed upon the rippling waters. “To be sure, the mail-boat will be
-along to-day, and she’ll stop if she’s hailed, but she can’t carry you
-all, and as for other boats, the long and short of it is, there ain’t
-none gone down, and there can’t none come up. There was a boat went up
-yesterday with vegetables from Lake Worth, but she won’t be back for
-a week, and then it’ll be a good while before she goes up again. Every
-boat that’s been down the river this month has gone up, and they tell
-me there ain’t nothin’ at Jupiter but the little sloop that belongs to
-the light-house keeper, and she’s hauled up to have a new mast put in
-her.”
-
-“Then what are we to do?” asked Phil, anxiously.
-
-“Dunno,” said Mr. Brewer.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VI.
-
-THE ROLLING STONE.
-
-
-The announcement so placidly made by Mr. John Brewer that it was
-impossible for our friends to get up the river until some of the
-sail-boats or small sloops--the only craft which then navigated that
-stream--should come down and go up again, gave rather a doleful hue to
-the state of affairs.
-
-Mr. Brewer stated that when a boat came down that far, she generally
-went all the way to Jupiter Inlet before she returned, and some of the
-big ones, when they got down there, went outside, and made a trip to
-Lake Worth, and they would, of course, be still longer coming back.
-
-The spirits of the boys were a good deal depressed, but Adam did not
-give up his hope that they might get passage on the mail-boat.
-
-“We can stow ourselves somewhere,” he said, “and when we get to Fort
-Capron, we’re likely to find a boat that’ll take us the rest of the
-way.”
-
-But when, an hour after, the mail-boat came in sight, even Adam’s hopes
-were crushed. It was not larger than a row-boat, with a small sail, and
-a cabin not three feet high, and besides the young man who sailed her,
-she already contained two passengers,--a sportsman who was returning
-north and a negro boy. There was no room for the latter to sit in the
-after-part of the vessel, and he had to make himself as comfortable as
-he could on the little bit of deck in front of the mast.
-
-It was so obviously plain that four additional passengers could not get
-on board that little boat that the subject was not even broached, Adam
-confining himself to inquiries in regard to the possibilities of there
-being other boats down the river of which Mr. Brewer had not heard.
-But the mail-carrier assured him that there were no boats down there
-that could come up inside of a week, and the sportsman declared that he
-never would have squeezed himself inside this little tub if there had
-been any other chance of his getting up the river.
-
-There was only one relief afforded by the mail-boat. The boys,
-anticipating that they might not be able to go on themselves, had each
-written a letter to his family, telling where he was, and giving a
-brief history of the state of affairs. Each letter, written on rumpled
-stationery supplied by Mr. Brewer, contained assurances of the perfect
-safety of the writer, and a request for money to be forwarded to
-Jacksonville, Florida, which point they hoped to reach in good time.
-
-These, with money for the postage, were given to the carrier, who
-promised to have them properly mailed at the first post-office on the
-river.
-
-A telegram was also written and given to the sporting gentleman, who
-promised to forward it as soon as he reached Sanford, on the St. John’s
-River, this being the nearest point from which telegrams could be sent.
-
-“There, now,” said Chap, when the little boat had sailed away, “I feel
-more comfortable. The folks will know all about us just as soon as if
-we had gone on ourselves, and that’s the main thing; for, as far as I’m
-concerned, I’m in no particular hurry to get home.”
-
-“You don’t want to stay here, do you?” asked Phœnix.
-
-“No,” said Chap; “but we can tramp along and camp out for a while, till
-a boat comes by and takes us on. I don’t want any better fun than that.”
-
-“We can’t tramp much farther on this beach,” said Phil. “It only
-reaches about a mile above us, Mr. Brewer says, and tramping and
-camping for a week or two, with no paths to walk in and nothing to eat,
-would be pretty tough work.”
-
-“We could push back to the sea-shore,” said Chap, “and walk along
-there.”
-
-“That might do as far as the walking is concerned,” said Phœnix; “but
-how about the victuals?”
-
-“I’m not quartermaster,” said Chap, “I’m captain; and I’ll lead you
-fellows anywhere you want to go.”
-
-“That’s the way to talk,” said Phil; “but it won’t do to lead us to any
-place so far from this house that we can’t hear them call at mealtime.
-We can’t live straight along on fish, you know.”
-
-A few minutes after this conversation, Adam Guy walked up to Mr.
-Brewer, who was leaning on the fence of his little garden.
-
-“Look here, John Brewer!” he cried; “what did you mean by sayin’ that
-we couldn’t get a boat to go up the river in? In that little creek back
-there, there’s a boat plenty big enough for us. Don’t she belong to
-you?”
-
-“Yes,” said Mr. Brewer, “she’s mine, but her mast’s unshipped, and her
-main-sail’s in the house to be mended.”
-
-“Can’t we ship the mast and mend the sail?” asked Adam.
-
-“Yes, you might do that,” answered Mr. Brewer.
-
-“Well, then,” cried Adam, “we’re all right! She doesn’t leak, does
-she? And you’ll hire her to us, won’t you?”
-
-“Her hull’s all right,” said Mr. John Brewer, “and I reckon I’d hire
-her to you.”
-
-“And why didn’t you tell us about her before?” exclaimed Adam.
-
-“You didn’t say anything about my hirin’ you a boat,” said the other.
-“If you’d ’a’ asked me, I’d ’a’ said you could have her.”
-
-Adam’s shouts soon brought the boys together, and a bargain was
-speedily concluded with Mr. Brewer, who agreed to hire his boat to our
-party for a dollar a day.
-
-“That is, till we reach Titusville,” said Adam; “but how are we goin’
-to get her back?”
-
-“Well,” said Mr. Brewer, “my brother went up to Enterprise last week,
-and he’ll be comin’ back afore long, and it’ll suit him fust-rate if
-you’ll leave the boat at Titusville, and then he can come down in her
-and save payin’ his passage on the mail-boat.”
-
-“That’s a pretty good arrangement for you and your brother,” said Chap.
-“I wonder you didn’t think of it before!”
-
-“I didn’t want to bother anybody to take a boat up the river jist for
-my brother,” said Mr. Brewer.
-
-Everybody now went gayly to work, Adam mending the sail with true
-sailor-like skill, and the boys, under Mr. Brewer’s direction, and
-with some of his assistance, getting the mast properly shipped and the
-boat cleaned out and made ready for her voyage.
-
-She was a well-built little craft, about twenty feet long, and with
-a small cabin, which would comfortably accommodate four persons. She
-carried a main-sail and a jib, and was, altogether, very suitable for
-the purposes of our friends.
-
-By night the boat was ready for the trip, but it was decided to
-postpone starting until the next morning. All the provisions which Mr.
-Brewer could spare were purchased, and, although he could not let them
-have enough to last the three or four days which it would require to
-reach Titusville, there were places along the river where they could
-replenish their stores.
-
-Mr. Brewer knew Adam for a good sailor, and had no hesitancy in
-trusting the boat to his care.
-
-The boys were perfectly delighted at the prospect before them. To sail
-up the river in a boat which was entirely their own during the voyage
-was a piece of good fortune they had not dreamed of.
-
-“What is the name of your boat?” asked Chap of Mr. Brewer, as they all
-sat together after supper.
-
-“Just now she ain’t got no name. She used to be called the Jane P.,
-after my first wife; but when she died I painted the name out, and
-this Mrs. Brewer don’t want the boat named after her, because she’s
-afraid she might die too; so, you see, she ain’t got no name.”
-
-“Well, then,” cried Chap, “we can name her ourselves--can’t we?”
-
-“Oh, yes,” said Mr. Brewer, “you can call her what you please, so long
-as you don’t name her after Mrs. Brewer.”
-
-The boys heartily agreed to this restriction, and a variety of names
-was now proposed; but after a time, the boys concluded that a title
-suggested by Phœnix was the jolliest and most suitable name for their
-boat, and they agreed to call her “The Rolling Stone.”
-
-“That’s a mighty queer name for a boat,” said Mr. Brewer. “It seems
-like it would sink her.”
-
-“But you needn’t keep it after we’ve done with her,” said Phil.
-
-“I don’t think I will,” said Mr. Brewer.
-
-And Adam, who had declared the name decidedly un-nautical and with
-something of an unlucky sound about it, said that after all he reckoned
-it didn’t matter much what the boat’s name was, provided they had a
-good wind.
-
-The next morning, after an early breakfast, provisions and a small keg
-of fresh water were put aboard; the baggage of the voyagers was safely
-stowed away; a double-barrelled gun, which had been hired of Mr.
-Brewer, was hung on a couple of little hooks inside the cabin, with the
-powder-flask and shot-pouch gracefully dangling beneath it; our party
-got on board, the sails were run up, and with a parting cheer to Mr.
-Brewer and three of his children, who stood on the bank of the little
-creek, and to Mrs. Brewer and the other child, who looked out from
-behind a half-opened shutter, The Rolling Stone was brought around to
-the wind, and sailed away on a long tack up the Indian River.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VII.
-
-THE TWO ORPHANS.
-
-
-The day was bright and beautiful, there was a fair wind, and The
-Rolling Stone, bending gently away from the breeze, sailed gayly over
-the rippling water. Adam was at the helm, and the boys were making
-themselves comfortable in various parts of the little craft, and
-enjoying to the utmost the delightful air and the bright sunshine.
-
-“I tell you what it is, boys!” cried Chap, who was stretched at full
-length on top of the little cabin, relying on Adam to give him notice
-when the boat was to be put about and the boom would swing around, “do
-you know I’d be as happy as a king if I felt sure our folks wouldn’t be
-worried about us?”
-
-“I don’t think we need worry about them,” said Phil, “for that hunting
-man said he’d be at Sanford before long, and then all our folks will
-hear from us just as quick as the telegraph can carry word to them.”
-
-“There’s a comfort in that,” said Chap.
-
-And Phœnix suggested that they might as well be as jolly as the law
-allowed.
-
-Adam made no remark upon the subject. He knew very well that it might
-take the sportsman a week, or perhaps longer, to reach the point
-from which he was to send the telegram he carried, but he wisely
-concluded that it would be of no use to dampen the spirits of his young
-companions, and that it would be better for all hands that they should
-be lively and cheerful.
-
-“Look here,” he said, “you boys can be happy as kings, if you like, but
-you needn’t think you’re goin’ to be lazy. I’m goin’ to teach you how
-to lend a hand to the sails, and make yourselves useful aboard ship.”
-
-“Lazy?” cried Chap. “Rolling stones are never lazy. Boys,” he
-exclaimed, struck by a sudden inspiration, “let’s call ourselves ‘The
-Rolling Stones.’ It’s as good a name for us as it is for the boat, and
-we expect to roll on till we get home.”
-
-“Agreed!” cried Phil and Phœnix.
-
-And the name was adopted.
-
-They sailed all day, eating a slight lunch about noon, and it was
-decided to anchor toward the close of the afternoon, and eat their
-evening meal on shore.
-
-The boys were anxious to have wild duck for supper, and they shot three
-or four of these birds, Adam skilfully steering the boat so close to
-the floating game that it could easily be picked up. Some fish were
-caught, and a fine fire was kindled on the beach.
-
-Cups, saucers, and a few cooking utensils had been procured from Mr.
-Brewer, and with roast duck, fish, some bacon, corn-bread and biscuit,
-and hot coffee, the party made an excellent meal.
-
-They sat round the camp-fire on the river bank until it was nearly
-dark, and then they went on board The Rolling Stone, and having tied
-her up securely, and made all things tight and right, they stowed
-themselves away in the cabin, which was divided into two compartments
-by the centre-board, and were soon asleep on the plain but sufficient
-bedding with which Mr. Brewer had furnished the boat.
-
-The next morning there was no wind at all. The surface of the river
-was as smooth as glass, and was only rippled by the water-fowl, which
-rose from or settled down upon it, or by the schools of little fish,
-which occasionally sprang a short distance out of the water, and fell
-pattering back like a shower of gravel-stones.
-
-“It’s no use to set sail till the wind rises,” said Adam; “so we might
-as well try to make ourselves contented on shore for a while. About
-ten or eleven o’clock p’rhaps we’ll have a breeze.”
-
-“All right!” said Chap. “We can pole the boat out into deep water and
-fish.”
-
-“Yes,” said Adam, “you boys can do that, if you like; but I think I’ll
-take the gun and go into the woods, and see if I can’t find some game.
-I noticed this mornin’ a kind o’ path back there which looked to me
-like a bear track. I’ve seen bear tracks afore, and, though I ain’t
-certain about this one, I think I’ll foller it up a little way.”
-
-“Good!” cried Phil; “and I’ll go with you.” Adam hesitated.
-
-“I dunno about that,” he said. “If we was to meet a bear, you wouldn’t
-have any gun, and you might feel sort o’ helpless. I’d tell you to take
-the gun and go by yourself, but I guess I know more about the ways of
-these wild critters than you do.”
-
-“I don’t want to go alone,” said Phil, “and I’m not afraid to go
-without a gun. There are two barrels there, and you can use one for me
-and one for yourself.”
-
-“Very well,” said Adam, “you can come. This shot-gun isn’t the right
-thing to take along if we expect to meet bears, but I’ll put half a
-dozen buckshot into each barrel, and I guess that’ll do for anything we
-get a crack at.”
-
-Phœnix would have been glad to go with Phil and Adam, but in that case
-Chap would have been left alone; and, besides, it would not do to make
-a bear-hunting party too large. So he got out his fishing-lines, and
-helped Chap pole the boat into deeper water, where they anchored her,
-and set comfortably to work to fish. The sport was not very exciting,
-for the large fish are only found in certain portions of the river, but
-the biting was lively, and the fish they hauled up were a good deal
-larger than those they used to catch at home.
-
-Adam and Phil made their way slowly along a path which the former had
-taken to be a bear track. Sometimes they got through the underbrush
-quite easily, and then, again, it would be very difficult and
-unpleasant to push through the thorny shrubbery and under low-hanging
-branches of small trees.
-
-“If we went on all-fours, like a bear,” said Adam, “it would be easy
-enough; but as we don’t, we’ve got to make the best of it.”
-
-They made the best of it for some time, occasionally losing the track,
-and then, finding it again, or supposing they had found it, they would
-bravely press forward.
-
-At last, to their great relief, they came to a place where the way was
-much more open; the bed of a very small stream, now dry, wound before
-them through the forest, and, as it was free from underbrush, it made
-a very convenient pathway.
-
-There was nothing in the appearance of this dry bed to indicate that
-a bear had been in the habit of walking in it; but, as it made a very
-good passage through the forest for a man and a boy, Phil and Adam
-cheerfully took their way up the stream.
-
-It did not matter much whether they saw a bear or not; for, if they did
-catch sight of one, Adam very much doubted if he could get it within
-range of a shot-gun. But they were both fond of the woods, and were
-glad to explore a semi-tropical forest like this.
-
-Adam was a hunter, as well as a sailor, for his adventurous experiences
-had been both on land and sea.
-
-On either side of them was a mass of vines and bushes, out of which the
-shorter or cabbage palmettos arose, wherever they could find room to
-spread their long and drooping leaf-stalks, which not only grew from
-their crests, but sprang out of the sides of their trunks, while, high
-above was the vast and impenetrable canopy of the leaves of the tall
-palmettos, each umbrella-like tuft supported by a long and slender stem.
-
-The forest thus appeared to be covered by a roof of green, held up by
-innumerable gray columns of pillars.
-
-Sometimes the monotony of the palmettos was broken by great live-oak
-trees, which reached high into the air, and whose massive branches,
-often curiously grotesque and crooked, bore not only their own bright
-and glossy leaves, but were covered throughout their length with vines
-and various fern-like growths, while from the lower part of these
-limbs, and from the trunks and branches of many other trees, hung long
-and graceful festoons of the silver-gray Spanish moss.
-
-The bark of many of the palmetto trunks was relieved by splotches of
-bright red, and here and there, sometimes on dead trees and sometimes
-on living ones, there were air-plants, their roots fastened in the dry
-wood, and their long, bending leaves stretching out into the air for
-the nutriment which most plants draw up from the earth.
-
-Phil was greatly interested in all these things, and Adam gazed about
-him with much satisfaction, although he had often walked in such woods
-before. He had been so long on ships and steamboats that this woodland
-ramble was a pleasant change.
-
-Phil stopped to cut some of the red patches of bark from a palmetto
-near him, hoping to be able to carry the pieces home to show as
-curiosities, and thus his companion had got some distance ahead of him.
-
-Adam was walking quietly along, when suddenly he heard, from a clump
-of thick bushes to his right, a low but very peculiar sound. It was a
-series of little whimpers and sniffs, that would not have been heard at
-all if the woods had not been so quiet.
-
-Instantly Adam stopped. He was sure he recognized that sound. Turning
-to the point whence it came, he peered earnestly into the shrubbery.
-Just above a low, heavy bush, not a dozen feet away from him, he saw
-the top of a round, black head, and a pair of glistening eyes.
-
-Without hesitating for a moment, he cocked both barrels of his gun, and
-taking a quick aim just above the eyes he saw before him, he pulled
-both triggers. A loud report rang through the forest, and the head
-disappeared.
-
-Phil, astounded by the discharge of the gun, started to run toward
-Adam, but the latter waved him back, and retreating a short distance,
-began rapidly reloading.
-
-When this was done, he waited a few minutes, and then, closely followed
-by Phil, he approached the bush at which he had fired.
-
-Hearing nothing but the little whimpers which had before attracted his
-attention, he cautiously made his way around the bush, his gun cocked
-and ready for instant use.
-
-But there was no occasion to use it. Upon the ground lay a large
-she-bear, dead, with twelve buckshot in her brain. In a
-slightly-hollowed place in the ground behind her were two young
-bears, about a foot long, round and fat, and rolling and pawing each
-other, while they continually sniffed and whimpered as if they wanted
-something, but did not know what it was.
-
-[Illustration: Adam tucking the other under his left arm.]
-
-Phil gave a shout of triumph when he hurried up behind Adam and saw the
-dead bear.
-
-“Why, this is glorious!” he cried. “Who could have thought you would
-have shot a real wild bear? Are you sure it’s dead?”
-
-“Oh, yes,” said Adam, cautiously punching the animal with the end of
-the gun; “bears don’t play ’possum. I put both loads into her head. And
-I didn’t do it any too soon, either. In two seconds more she’d a’ been
-out after me.”
-
-“Can’t we skin her?” cried Phil. “It would be a splendid thing to take
-home a bear-skin that we got ourselves.”
-
-“I’d like well enough to have the skin,” said Adam, “but I ain’t goin’
-to stop to take it off. If the old he-bear comes home while we are
-here, he’ll make it hot for us. Just you pick up one of them young
-cubs, and I’ll take the other, and the quicker we’re off the better.”
-
-Phil had been so delighted at seeing the dead bear that he had scarcely
-noticed the young ones, but he now picked up one of them, while Adam,
-tucking the other under his left arm, hastily led the way to the bed
-of the stream, down which they hurried as fast as they could go.
-
-When Phil and Adam reached the point where they left the bed of the
-stream, which here turned to the south, and began to force their way
-through the bushes and vines, and over the uneven ground, they went
-more slowly.
-
-To push through and under the tangled maze on each side of the
-barely-discernible track, to hold securely the struggling cub which
-each of them carried, and to keep an ear open all the time for the
-approach of an enraged bear, which might be in pursuit of them, was as
-much as they could do.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VIII.
-
-“CAPTAIN OF HIMSELF.”
-
-
-Captain Chap and Treasurer Phœnix had a very good time fishing, and
-before long they had caught many more fish than they thought would
-be needed for that night’s supper. They were not at all sure that
-everything they had taken was good to eat, but they thought that Adam
-would be able to pick out of the catch enough for a meal. They had no
-blue-fish or bass, for this was not a part of the river where these
-were to be found, nor did Chap have an opportunity to exercise his
-strength in hauling in another powerful cavalio.
-
-After a time Chap wound up his line.
-
-“It’s no use catching any more fish,” he said. “We have enough of them
-now, and we might as well pole the boat ashore, and wash off this
-forward deck. But before we do that, I’m going to take a swim.”
-
-“That would be a good idea,” said Phœnix.
-
-“It’s as warm down in this part of the world as if it was summer-time,
-and the water looks so nice and clear I feel as if I’d like to jump
-into it.”
-
-Both boys now began to undress, but Chap was ready first, and standing
-on the top of the little cabin he made a dive into the water. He soon
-rose again to the surface, and swimming around in a small circle,
-returned to the boat.
-
-“You’d better take care how you dive,” he said to Phœnix, reaching up
-as he spoke and taking hold of the side of the boat. “The bottom is
-horrid. It’s all covered with oysters, and it won’t do to get any of
-the water in your mouth, for it’s salt.”
-
-“Why, didn’t you know that?” said Phœnix, who was not quite ready to
-go in. “This river is really only an arm of the sea, and all those big
-fish we caught the other day came in from the ocean.”
-
-“Yes, I remember Adam’s telling about it,” said Chap, “but I forgot it.
-I don’t believe I care to swim in such water as this. It isn’t like the
-ocean, and it isn’t like the real, honest river. The water isn’t very
-deep out here, but it seemed sort of scary to me when I went down.”
-
-“I guess that’s because of the queer things you know are in the river,”
-suggested Phœnix.
-
-“I shouldn’t wonder if that was it,” said Chap.
-
-Just at this moment a sound was heard in the river that made the boys
-jump. It was the noise of something rushing through the water, and,
-looking around, they saw part of the back and tail of a great fish,
-which was surging along at a tremendous rate toward the boat.
-
-Chap instinctively pulled himself up by his hands, and Phœnix made a
-frenzied clutch at his arm and jerked him out of the water and over the
-side of the boat before Chap knew what he intended to do.
-
-The fish swept within ten feet of them, and then making a turn, it
-seemed to shake itself as if with disappointment and anger, and,
-dashing along like a steamboat for a short distance, it raised its tail
-in the air and disappeared.
-
-“What was that thing?” asked Chap, as soon as he could find voice to
-speak.
-
-“Can’t say,” answered Phœnix, his face still pale, “unless it was a
-shark.”
-
-“It couldn’t be that,” returned Chap. “It must have been a porpoise, or
-something of that kind.”
-
-“Porpoises don’t chase people,” said Phœnix, “and that creature came
-after you, Chap. He must have seen you when you made your dive, and
-it’s lucky for you that he didn’t start sooner.”
-
-“That’s so,” said Chap. “Let’s pull up the anchor and pole her ashore.
-No more swimming in these waters for me!”
-
-The boys quickly dressed themselves and hauled on the long anchor rope
-until they had pulled the boat into water where they could reach the
-bottom with their pole. Then pushing her in, they made her fast to the
-shore, and went to work to gather up their fish and make things clean
-and tidy.
-
-While they were thus engaged, Phil and Adam, hot and flushed, made
-their appearance from the woods. The astonishment of Chap and Phœnix
-when their companions ran to them and proudly held up the little bears
-is not to be described.
-
-“Isn’t this something like a bear-hunt?” cried Phil. “Killed an old
-one, and carried off these youngsters. To be sure, Adam did it all, but
-I gave him moral support.”
-
-Chap and Phœnix now loudly demanded a full account of the adventures of
-the others, and when these had been told and the little bears had been
-admired and patted and finally stowed away in an old box, which was
-lined with a blanket from one of the beds, Chap exhibited the fish he
-and Phœnix had caught, and told of the big fellow they had seen in the
-water.
-
-“You don’t mean to say you went in to swim?” exclaimed Adam. “I never
-thought of your doin’ a thing like that when I left you. Why, do you
-know you were in a great deal more danger than we were, even if the old
-man-bear had got after us? That big fish you saw was a shark, and if
-it had come along a little sooner, it would a’ taken off one of your
-legs as like as not. This is a very good river, but it wasn’t made for
-white folks to swim in--at least, not in these parts. There are plenty
-of sharks here, and I’m not sure but what you might tempt a ’gator, if
-you were very anxious to get bit.”
-
-“Do you know,” said Chap, in a very impressive way, “that I never
-thought that there were sharks in this river, and that I totally,
-absolutely, and utterly forgot alligators?”
-
-“Sharks!” exclaimed Adam, looking at the fish the boys had caught.
-“Why, you ought to have known they were in the river, for here you’ve
-got one!”
-
-“A shark!” cried all the boys together, as they clustered around the
-pile of fish.
-
-“Yes,” said Adam, pointing to a fish about a foot and a half long, with
-a smooth skin and a large flat-topped head; “this is a young shark.”
-
-“Upon my word,” cried Chap, “we hadn’t the least idea of that! We
-thought the thing was a big cat-fish. We noticed it hadn’t any feelers
-on its mouth, but we supposed cat-fish might be different down here
-from those we’re used to. We had lots of trouble in getting the hook
-out of its mouth.”
-
-“It’s a lucky thing you didn’t get your fingers into those jaws,” said
-Adam, “for you might never have got them out again.”
-
-“Gentlemen,” cried Chap, throwing one arm into the air, “it’s time we
-got away from this place. For all we know, there’s a savage bear raging
-through the woods after some of us, and out there in the river there’s
-an exasperated shark waiting till one of the party is foolish enough to
-go in to swim or accidentally tumbles overboard. Let’s up sail and be
-off!”
-
-“Well,” said Adam, “as there’s a good breeze gettin’ up from the
-sou’east, that’s about the best thing we can do, even if we don’t take
-into account bears and sharks.”
-
-As soon as they were fairly under way, Adam gave the tiller to one
-of the boys, and set about taking care of his young bears. A small
-quantity of condensed milk in tin cans had been purchased of Mr.
-Brewer, and some of this, mixed with water, was fed to the cubs. They
-were very hungry, and soon lapped it up eagerly.
-
-“It seems like a cruel thing,” said Chap, “to break up a family in that
-manner.”
-
-“Well,” replied Adam, “the only way bears can be made of any good to
-anybody is to kill ’em or carry ’em off for shows. If people didn’t do
-that, there’d better be no bears. Now, if I kin keep these young ones
-alive, and git ’em up North, I kin sell ’em to some menagerie man or
-show-keeper for a nice little lot of money. Baby bears ain’t common in
-shows, and these are as cute little creatures as I ever see.”
-
-The breeze which had arisen did not prove to be very strong, and the
-progress of The Rolling Stone was slow. After a time the wind gradually
-changed its direction, and there sprung up one of those sudden squalls
-which were frequent on the Indian River. The wind blew a hurricane,
-the surface of the river was covered with tossing waves, and The
-Rolling Stone would probably have rolled entirely over if Adam had not
-noticed the approach of the wind-storm and taken quick precautions. The
-boat was laid with her head to the gale, and both sails were rapidly
-lowered, and when the little bears had been carefully wrapped up and
-tucked in, so that they would not take cold, there was nothing to do
-but to lie-to till the storm had passed over.
-
-Then, in the afternoon, the wind got around to the northeast, which was
-almost dead ahead. Adam was obliged to tack backward and forward all
-the afternoon. The boys became rather tired of doing so much sailing
-and making so little progress, and when the boat had gradually worked
-its way about a mile above a small river, which flowed into the Indian
-River from the west, everybody was glad to land at a convenient place
-on the west side of the river and make the evening fire.
-
-The next morning, the wind blew more strongly from the north, and, what
-was worse, there was not a drop of milk left for the little bears.
-
-“There’s a store about fifteen miles above this place,” said Adam; “but
-these cubs will starve before we kin beat up there agin this wind. They
-take a lot o’ feedin’, and they’re nearly famished now. But back from
-the river, about a mile and a half up, there’s a man who has a little
-orange-grove. I was there once, and I know he keeps a lot of supplies
-on hand. I’ll walk over there and see if I can’t get some milk.”
-
-Soon after Adam had started, Phil said he thought he would take the
-gun and go into the woods, and see if he could not find some game. He
-did not intend to look for any bears, but he thought he might find
-something smaller.
-
-“I’d like to go along,” said Phœnix, “if it wasn’t that somebody has
-got to take care of the boat and things, and I don’t want to leave Chap
-alone.”
-
-“Nobody need trouble himself about me,” said Chap; “you go along, and
-I’ll stay here and fish. I made up my mind to do that as soon as Adam
-said he was going.”
-
-“All right,” said Phil; “but mind you don’t go in to swim.”
-
-“You needn’t be afraid of that!” cried Chap, as his two companions
-walked away. “I expect the fish here are not at all like those we
-caught before,” he said to himself, as he cut up some pieces of bait.
-“They seem to be different at every place we stop.”
-
-Chap was a strange fellow. He liked his friends, and he was fond of
-company, but he was even more fond of entirely independent action.
-
-“Now, then,” he said to himself, “I can go ahead and fish just as I
-please. I’m not quite sure that I’m always captain of this party, but
-one thing is certain, I can be captain of myself.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IX.
-
-FRIENDS AND ENEMIES.
-
-
-Chap began his independent operations by poling The Rolling Stone to
-some distance from the shore. Then dropping the anchor and letting out
-the rope, he pushed his boat out as long as his pole would touch bottom.
-
-There was not much current, but the wind blew the boat inland, so that
-Chap found that he would have to be continually pushing her out if he
-wished to keep her in water deep enough for fishing.
-
-He was afraid to go out where he could not touch bottom with his pole,
-for the wind was strong, and he did not know what would happen if he
-tried to sail her.
-
-So, at last, he gave up fishing and poled back to shore. Putting away
-his fishing tackle, he began to try to comfort the little bears, who
-were whining and whimpering and tumbling over each other, showing the
-greatest distress at being obliged to wait for their breakfast.
-
-While thus engaged, there came down the river a dirty little boat, with
-a dirty little sail, in the stern of which sat two very untidy young
-men.
-
-When it was within a hundred yards of The Rolling Stone, this boat, the
-approach of which Chap had not noticed, was run ashore, and the two
-untidy young men, each carrying a gun, came walking down the narrow
-beach.
-
-When they were near the boat, Chap heard them, and looking up, was very
-much surprised to see these strangers. They saluted Chap in a friendly
-way, and as The Rolling Stone was near the shore, they stepped on
-board, and sitting down, began to talk to him.
-
-The untidy young men asked Chap a great many questions, all of which he
-answered freely.
-
-“So you’re in a great hurry to get North?” said one of them.
-
-“Oh, yes,” said Chap. “You see, our friends don’t know where we are,
-and we wouldn’t stop anywhere, if we didn’t have to.”
-
-“And the rest of the party has gone off and left you here by yourself,”
-said the other. “We was a-wonderin’ as we was comin’ down what you was
-doin’ here on the boat.”
-
-“I tried to fish,” said Chap, “but I couldn’t keep her out.”
-
-“If you fellers want to git up the river in a hurry, you ought to have
-a smaller boat that’ll sail ag’in the wind better’n this one. Now we’ve
-got a little boat up there that we want to send back to Titusville, and
-you’ve got one you want to send back to John Brewer. If you say so,
-we’ll trade, and that’ll suit all parties.”
-
-“Oh, we wouldn’t think of that,” said Chap, rather contemptuously,
-looking up at the craft they had left. “Your boat is entirely too small
-for us, and this suits us first-rate. It’s a regular little yacht.”
-
-“Yes,” said the other, looking around him, “she’s a mighty comfortable
-boat.”
-
-After examining the little bears, and asking a few more questions, the
-two young men stepped ashore and walked up to their own boat.
-
-Chap thought they were going to re-embark, but this they did not
-do. They loaded themselves with some pouches and flasks, a basket
-containing canned food of various kinds, a bag of flour, and a few
-articles of wearing apparel.
-
-These things they brought down to The Rolling Stone, and, much to
-Chap’s surprise, they put them all aboard.
-
-“What are you about?” cried our friend, springing to his feet.
-
-“We’re goin’ to trade boats,” said one of the young men, as he stepped
-on board.
-
-“No, you are not!” cried Chap, in great excitement.
-
-And then, at the top of his voice, he gave a wild shout, hoping that
-Adam or the boys might hear him.
-
-“Push her off!” said the young man on board to the one on shore.
-
-And in a moment The Rolling Stone was floating in one or two feet of
-water.
-
-The other young man now scrambled on deck, and, having pulled the
-anchor on board, he came aft, where Chap was already engaged in
-endeavoring to put his companion overboard.
-
-Both men now threw themselves on Chap, and, in a very short time, that
-unfortunate fellow was floundering in the shallow water.
-
-Rising to his feet, he made a rush toward the boat, and would have
-boarded her had not the muzzle of a shot-gun been pointed at his head.
-
-“Just you stay where you are,” said the young man with the gun, as the
-other seized the pole and pushed The Rolling Stone out into deep water.
-“If you hadn’t hollered for your fellers we’d ’a’ put some of your
-things ashore, but we haven’t time for that now. Good-by.”
-
-And putting down his gun, the speaker took the tiller, while his
-companion hauled up the main-sail, and in about a minute The Rolling
-Stone was scudding down the river before a strong north wind.
-
-At first Chap stood bewildered. His mind could scarcely comprehend the
-fact that there were two men in the world who would do the thing that
-these young men had just done. To throw him out of his own boat, and
-make off with it before his eyes! Could it all be real?
-
-But he did not long stand still. His active nature made it necessary
-for him to do something. If he had had a gun he would have fired after
-the rascals, but as it was he could do absolutely nothing by himself,
-and the first thing to be thought of now was to let the others know
-what had happened.
-
-Giving a last look at the retreating boat, he saw that one of the young
-men was pouring what appeared to be milk in a tin basin. The villains
-knew that the bears were hungry, and as they had milk with them, they
-evidently intended to feed them and bring them up as their own.
-
-Was there ever such unparalleled impudence? The sight made his blood
-boil, and he involuntarily shook his fist at the retreating boat.
-
-There was a rough path or narrow roadway which ran through the woods
-in the direction in which Adam had gone, and along this path Chap now
-ran at the top of his speed. The boys had also gone this way, and he
-thought he must soon overtake some of his party.
-
-It happened, however, as it has happened so often before to many
-a traveller, that Chap soon came to a point where there were two
-diverging paths, and he did not know which was the one that Adam had
-taken.
-
-He stopped for about a quarter of a minute to consider, and then, like
-many another unfortunate traveller, he took the wrong path.
-
-Away he dashed along the track which led to the left, stopping every
-now and then to shout at the top of his voice. At last his breath began
-to fail him, and then he rested for a time.
-
-As soon as he had recovered a little, he shouted and shouted again, but
-no answering shout came back to him, and then he started off again. He
-did not run now, but he walked rapidly.
-
-If he kept on, he thought, he must soon reach the house to which Adam
-had gone, but he walked and walked and walked until he felt sure he
-must have gone two or three miles; but then distances are not judged
-very accurately in wild places such as this, and Adam might have been
-mistaken in supposing the house was only a mile and a half away.
-
-This path certainly led somewhere, and he would keep on a little while
-longer. If he did not soon come to a house, he would turn back.
-
-He did not soon come to a house, and he sat down on a fallen tree to
-rest. As he sat there, he felt very badly about the matter. As it had
-so happened that he had not found Adam and the boys, he felt that it
-would have been better if he had remained by the river. The others had
-probably arrived there by this time, and when he should get back and
-tell them what had happened, they would all feel that a great deal of
-valuable time had been lost by his running away into the woods. He was
-tired, and hungry, too, and the thought struck him that he did not know
-how they were going to get anything to eat, unless they all went to the
-house of which Adam had spoken.
-
-“I’m glad the scoundrels did not run away with Phœnix’s money,” he
-thought.
-
-And that was the only ray of comfort that seemed to shine across his
-present miserable existence.
-
-And yet he did not blame himself for what had happened. Perhaps he
-ought not to have come so far into the woods, but he had done it for
-the best.
-
-He now arose, and as he did so he looked along a portion of the path
-which stretched in an almost straight line before him, and at the end
-of the little vista which it made, he saw some blue and curling smoke.
-
-“Hurrah!” he cried. “A house is just ahead! Why on earth was I so
-foolish as to stop here?” and so saying, he hurried along the path.
-
-When he arrived at the place where he saw the smoke, he found no house,
-but in a little open space in the woods there was a fire on the ground,
-and hanging from a branch of a tree above the fire was a covered tin
-vessel, very much blackened by smoke, in which something seemed to be
-simmering.
-
-Chap stopped and looked at the fire. As he did so two men arose from
-the foot of a tree and came toward him. As soon as Chap looked at these
-men he knew they were Indians.
-
-Chap had seen Indians before in the city near which he lived, but
-these were on exhibition, and were dressed in all the paraphernalia
-of blankets, leggings, feathers, and dangling ornaments, which are
-generally supposed to make up the ordinary costume of the American
-Indian; but he had never seen the red man in his native wilds, and the
-dress of these Indians surprised him almost as much as their appearance
-on the spot. They had copper-colored faces, high cheek-bones, jet-black
-hair, and wore moccasins, and these were the only points of resemblance
-between them and the traditional Indian.
-
-They each wore a blue-flannel shirt, a pair of thick cotton trousers,
-and a dilapidated felt hat. One of them carried a powder-horn and a
-buckskin bullet-pouch, and against the tree, beneath which they had
-been sitting, there leaned a rifle.
-
-As the Indians approached, one of them held out his hand. Chap had not
-made up his mind whether to be relieved or frightened when he saw the
-Indians, but he took the tawny hand that was offered him, and gave it a
-shake. There seemed to be nothing else to do.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER X.
-
-PHIL’S UNCLE AND CHAP’S SISTER.
-
-
-We must now return for a time to Hyson Hall and its neighborhood, where
-the families of our three young friends were naturally much disturbed
-at their long-continued absence. On the morning of the day which Chap
-Webster had fixed for his return from the Breakwater, Mr. Godfrey
-Berkeley, Phil’s uncle, rode over to the Webster place, and found
-Chap’s mother already wondering what train the boys would come up in.
-
-“Now, Mrs. Webster,” said Mr. Godfrey, “don’t you expect them by any
-train to-day. When boys start off on an expedition like that, they
-cannot fix a date for their return. It is impossible for them to know
-exactly how long it will take to get to the Breakwater; how many delays
-will occur while there and on their return. I do not expect them until
-to-morrow, or perhaps the day after.”
-
-These very sensible remarks comforted Mrs. Webster for the time being,
-but when two more days passed, and her son did not return, she became
-greatly troubled. Mr. Poole, the father of Phœnix, also sent over to
-Hyson Hall to know if Mr. Berkeley had heard anything from the boys.
-Mr. Godfrey himself began to think it was quite time that the young
-fellows had returned, or made some report of their doings. If they had
-been delayed at the Breakwater, they should have telegraphed.
-
-While he was considering this matter, and blaming Phil a good deal for
-his negligence, a messenger came to him from the city, sent by one
-of the members of the tug-boat company, with whom he was acquainted,
-telling him how the boat had gone to sea and had never returned, and
-begging him to break the matter as well as he could to the Webster and
-Poole families.
-
-Poor Mr. Godfrey had grief enough of his own when he heard this
-intelligence, but he did not give up hope, and hurried away to do what
-he could to help and encourage his afflicted neighbors.
-
-The Poole family were very willing to listen to Mr. Berkeley’s hopeful
-words, and promised to keep up good hearts until they could hear from
-him again, and even Mrs. Webster, although terribly shocked, did not
-entirely despair. There never was a man who could put a brighter side
-to dreary things than Mr. Godfrey Berkeley.
-
-“But I shall die upon the spot,” she said, “if something is not done.
-If I can know that somebody is doing something, I can wait in hope; but
-if we are to sit here with our hands folded, I shall go crazy. I should
-start off this minute myself if I knew what to do or where to go, and
-if there were not so many things that make it almost impossible for me
-to leave home just now.”
-
-Mr. Godfrey assured her that something was to be done instantly, for
-he was going to start for the city by the very next train; thereupon,
-Helen, Chap’s only sister, who was even more grieved by the dreadful
-news than her mother, although she did not say so much about it, begged
-that she might go with Mr. Godfrey.
-
-“I want to hear any news as soon as it comes,” she said. “I don’t think
-I can sit still here and wait. And then, if anything is heard from
-them, Mr. Godfrey may want to stay down in the city, and I can come
-up and tell you. That will be ever so much better than letters and
-telegrams.”
-
-Mr. Webster was absent in the West, and as Mrs. Webster thought it very
-proper that some of the family should do something in the matter, she
-gave Helen permission to accompany Mr. Berkeley, who was very glad to
-have for a companion this sensible and courageous girl.
-
-In the city they heard the full particulars of the occurrence as far as
-they were known.
-
-“Has nothing been heard of the vessel which the tug-boat went out to
-offer to bring in?” asked Mr. Godfrey Berkeley.
-
-“She never came into the Breakwater at all,” was the answer. “She must
-have concluded to lie-to that night, for the wind was dead against her.
-She was the Cygnet, bound to Norfolk, Virginia, and we heard yesterday
-that she was spoken the next day by a coasting vessel coming North.
-The gale had pretty well gone down by that time, and she’d rigged up a
-jury-mast, and was making her way to her port with a fair wind.”
-
-“Mr. Godfrey,” said Helen, who had been listening attentively, “don’t
-you suppose that ship might have picked up the people on the tug-boat
-if they were wrecked? Perhaps Chap and the others are on board of her
-now.”
-
-“I am afraid there is not much hope in that direction,” said the agent
-of the company, “for the tug and the disabled schooner do not appear
-to have had anything to do with each other. Our belief is that the
-tug-boat was driven out to sea by the storm, on account of some of her
-machinery getting out of order, and that the persons on board were
-probably picked up by some passing vessel, from which we may hear at
-any day.”
-
-“But I think,” persisted Helen, “that we ought not to wait for that.
-I believe that we ought to go to Norfolk and meet that one-masted
-schooner. If Chap and the other boys are on board, I’d like to be there
-when they come in.”
-
-Mr. Berkeley had been quietly thinking about the matter, and although
-he was very much afraid that there was little reason for supposing that
-his dear Phil and the other boys were on board the Cygnet, still he
-felt that nothing should be left undone, and that even this little ray
-of hope should not be abandoned, and he therefore determined to go to
-Norfolk, and as Helen plead so earnestly to go with him, he agreed to
-take her.
-
-She asserted that her valise contained everything she needed, and
-he assumed the responsibility of taking her upon this trip, feeling
-sure that nothing would satisfy Mrs. Webster so much as to know that
-something was still being done. He therefore telegraphed to Boontown,
-and he and Helen set off for Norfolk as soon as possible.
-
-When they reached Norfolk, the Cygnet had not yet come in. Her passage
-down the coast had probably been very slow, and she might have been
-also delayed by additional accidents to her sailing-gear, which, from
-all accounts, must have been in a very bad condition.
-
-Mr. Godfrey and the young girl walked about the piers and wharves all
-the afternoon, and as night approached, and no Cygnet had come in,
-Helen went back to the hotel with a fear that the boys had suffered a
-second shipwreck.
-
-But early in the morning, word was brought to Mr. Berkeley that the
-disabled Cygnet lay in the Roads, and it was not long before he and
-Helen were being rapidly rowed out to the schooner.
-
-But when they went on board, they saw no Chap, no Phil, no Phœnix. The
-boys had never been on the vessel.
-
-Poor Helen sank down on something, she knew not what it was, and
-covered her face with her hands, but in a few minutes afterward Mr.
-Godfrey stood before her, and put his hand on her head.
-
-“Helen!” he cried, “look up. I have splendid news!”
-
-Helen gave a start, and looking at Mr. Berkeley, she saw that his eyes
-were sparkling, and that his face was glowing with delight.
-
-“Just think of it, Helen!” he cried. “The captain here tells me that
-the next morning after the tug-boat came out to meet him, he saw her,
-with his glass, tossing about on the waves a long way off. He knew she
-must have been blown out to sea by the storm, and he kept watch on her.
-She was so far away that the people on board of her could not have seen
-his vessel if they had not a good ship’s glass. He was sure she was
-disabled, and would have gone to her assistance if he had not been
-disabled himself. But now, hear this--this is the splendid part. Some
-time afterward, he saw a steamship come along, and as he kept his glass
-on the spot he saw the steamer lie-to and take people off the tug-boat.
-Of course, she took everybody. And then she started on her way South.
-He says he is quite sure she is a Savannah steamer.”
-
-“Oh, Mr. Godfrey,” cried Helen, clapping her hands, “this is glorious!
-Let’s go straight to Savannah!”
-
-“Why, you madcap girl,” laughed Mr. Berkeley, “I believe you would
-follow those fellows all round the world!”
-
-“Indeed I would,” said Helen, “if I could only be sure of meeting dear
-Chap at last!”
-
-When they went back to the hotel, Mr. Berkeley actually considered this
-plan of going to Savannah. He calculated that the steamer should have
-arrived at that port some days before, and if the boys were there, they
-were probably in trouble, for, otherwise, they certainly should have
-been heard from.
-
-He could not imagine why they had not telegraphed or written. His joy,
-therefore, at the news given him by the captain of the Cygnet, was
-much dampened after this careful consideration of the case. At any
-rate, he determined to go to Savannah. If the steamer was really bound
-there, the boys ought to be looked after, and he felt, as well as Mrs.
-Webster, that something ought to be doing until they were found.
-
-Of course, he had to take Helen with him, as he could not send her home
-alone, and having telegraphed the Cygnet’s news to Boontown, the two
-started for Savannah that afternoon.
-
-When they reached that city, Mr. Berkeley made diligent inquiries in
-regard to the arrival of three shipwrecked boys, but he heard that only
-two steamers had come in within a week, and that neither of these had
-fallen in with a disabled tug-boat.
-
-When even his stout heart was beginning to despair, and poor Helen
-looked as if she had been ill for a month, there came a telegram from
-Boontown. It was from Mr. Welford, a banker of that place, and a friend
-of Mr. Berkeley’s, to whom the telegram had been addressed which the
-boys had forwarded by the sportsman they had met on the Indian River.
-
-Mr. Welford lived in the town, and a telegram sent to him would be
-immediately delivered, and the boys knew he would lose no time in
-notifying their families.
-
-The telegram now received from Mr. Welford informed Mr. Godfrey
-Berkeley that the boys were on the Indian River, Florida, and were
-coming North as fast as possible.
-
-This news made the world seem like a different place to Phil’s uncle
-and Chap’s sister. This was something real and tangible.
-
-“It seems as if we knew just where the boys were,” cried Helen.
-
-“Yes,” said Mr. Godfrey, laughing, “we might take the map, and almost
-point out the exact spot where they ought to be by this time; but, most
-probably, we would make a mistake, and we won’t do it. It is enough to
-know that they are in Florida, and we shall probably see them soon.”
-
-“Shall we wait here for them?” said Helen.
-
-“I have not made up my mind about that,” replied Mr. Berkeley.
-
-But before he made up his mind a telegram came from Mrs. Webster, which
-read thus:
-
- “Please go and meet my boy. He has not a cent, and scarcely any
- clothes.”
-
-“All right,” said Mr. Berkeley, when this characteristic message had
-been read and considered. “I shall be very glad to take a trip into
-summer land, for it is getting very bleak and cold up our way. Of
-course, your mother means that I shall take you with me, Miss Helen,
-and it will do you good, for if ever a girl needed to have plumpness
-and rosiness brought back to her cheeks, you do. The boys are bound
-to come down the St. John’s River to Jacksonville, and we can’t miss
-them.”
-
-And so the two started for Florida.
-
-“Won’t they be surprised when they see us?” said Helen, when she and
-Mr. Godfrey had taken their seats in the car.
-
-“I hope so,” said Mr. Godfrey. “Half our pleasure will be lost if we
-don’t astonish them.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XI.
-
-TWO EXPEDITIONS.
-
-
-“Come from the river?” said the Indian who had shaken hands with Chap.
-“Been fishin’? Where’s the rest of ’em?”
-
-The very fair English which this Indian spoke was a new surprise to
-Chap, and for an instant he wondered how the man knew there were any
-more of them; but as any one might reasonably suppose that a young
-fellow like himself would not come into this part of the country alone,
-the question seemed sensible enough. The other Indian now came up, and,
-without saying anything, seemed very anxious to hear what should be
-said.
-
-Chap then briefly related his story. For some reason which he could not
-explain he had for these Indians a feeling very different from that
-with which, from the very first, he had regarded the untidy young men.
-To be sure, he had answered their questions, for there seemed to be
-no good reason for refusing; but he had felt all along that they were
-unpleasant companions, and had hoped they would soon go away. But these
-Indians seemed to have honest faces, and to take a friendly interest in
-what he told them.
-
-When he related how the boat had been stolen from him, the Indians
-looked at each other, and each of them gave a grunt.
-
-“Big thieves! big thieves!” said one. “Come down on river and steal
-boat. Very bad thieves, them!”
-
-The other one nodded.
-
-“Bad thieves! bad thieves!” he said.
-
-Chap now asked the Indians where they supposed the two fellows would
-take the boat.
-
-“Go up river back here,” said the Indian who did the most talking.
-“Think you won’t find ’em and go home. Then they shoot ’gators and have
-fun.”
-
-“But why should they take our boat?” asked Chap. “They have one of
-their own.”
-
-“P’raps she leak. Yours good boat,” said the other. “But some men bad,
-nobody knows why.”
-
-To this piece of philosophy the other nodded assent, and then, for a
-few minutes, the two talked together in their own language.
-
-These men were Seminole Indians, belonging to the remnant of the
-powerful tribe which once waged war against the United States and
-Florida. But the Seminoles who may now occasionally be met in the lower
-part of the State are generally quiet and peaceable, and glad enough to
-sell some venison or other game to the sportsmen or tourists they may
-meet in the forests or on the rivers in the unsettled portions of the
-State.
-
-When the two Indians had finished their conversation, the talker made
-a proposition to Chap. He told him that he and his companion, with two
-others, who were now probably a mile or two away, had come into this
-part of the country on a hunting expedition; but that, if he would pay
-them for their trouble, they would go after these fellows and capture
-the boat.
-
-“River bends ’round here,” said the talker, waving his hand behind him,
-“and they got to sail that way. ’Fraid to keep on big river. You get
-boat, go after ’em. We go straight through woods, and ketch ’em when
-they go camp at night. Then bring boat back to you.”
-
-Chap stood and considered the matter, and a brilliant plan soon entered
-his head. If he went back to confer with his companions, a great deal
-of time would be lost, and there might be diversities of opinion as
-to what should be done. He felt that the proper thing to do was to
-follow the Indian’s advice, and go a short way through the woods and
-intercept the fellows when they camped.
-
-They were certain to come on shore to cook their evening meal, and
-these Indians seemed to know the very spot where they would be likely
-to land.
-
-“Now,” thought Chap, “I’ve a great mind to put myself at the head of
-these Indians and recapture The Rolling Stone. Instead of going and
-telling the other fellows that I’ve lost the boat, I’ll bring it back
-to them. They’re bound to wait for me, and they can find quarters in
-that house that Adam went to.”
-
-Chap thereupon told the Indians that if they and their companions would
-assist him in recapturing the boat, he would see that they were paid
-for their time and trouble. He also made them understand that he would
-lead the expedition, provided that they would show him the way.
-
-To all this the Indians assented, exhibiting a willingness to leave the
-amount of their remuneration entirely to Chap’s generosity, and while
-one of them started off to find his absent companions, the other set
-about preparing for Chap a portion of the food that was cooking on the
-fire, for our friend declared himself nearly famished.
-
-“Isn’t this a high old change in things?” said Chap to himself, as he
-sat watching the Indian stirring the unknown mess in the blackened
-vessel he had taken from the fire. “Just a little while ago I was
-hanging about home, expecting to hear that school would begin next day,
-and here I am, in the wilds of Florida, and about to lead a band of red
-men through the trackless forest.”
-
- * * * * *
-
-Phil and Phœnix wandered for a good distance along the woodland path.
-Except the birds which they saw flying about above the forest when they
-occasionally came to an open place in the green roof over them, they
-found nothing to shoot at.
-
-They had fired a few shots at these, without effect, much to Phil’s
-disappointment, for he wished to take home some trophies of this trip,
-even if they were nothing but wings and tails of strange birds, when
-they met Adam returning with two small cans of milk.
-
-The good sailor was in a great hurry to get back to his little bears,
-and he told the boys that they must come with him, for they would start
-off now as soon as they could, for he had noticed, when he was up at
-the house, that the wind had got round a little to the east, and that
-they, therefore, would be able to make pretty good headway.
-
-But when the three arrived at the river-side, and found no boat and
-no Chap and no bears, their astonishment was so great that they could
-scarcely find words to express it.
-
-“Has that boy gone off with the boat?” at last exclaimed Adam.
-
-“I can scarcely believe it,” said Phil, “and yet there’s no knowing
-what Chap would do if an idea suddenly came into his head.”
-
-“But Chap can’t sail a boat,” said Phœnix, “and he would never think of
-going out in a wind like this. Perhaps the boat got loose accidentally.”
-
-“I don’t think that happened,” said Adam, who was scanning the river
-with his experienced eye, “for if she’s got off, she’d ’a’ blown down
-the river, and I can’t see a sign of her. Of course there’s no way of
-her gettin’ up-stream ag’in such a wind as this.”
-
-As he spoke, Adam turned and looked up-stream, and then he caught
-sight of the dirty little boat which had been run ashore by the two
-untidy young men, and with a sudden “Hello!” he ran toward it, followed
-closely by the boys.
-
-When he reached the boat, the sailor looked at it and in it and around
-it, but he said not a word.
-
-“Whose boat can this be?” cried Phil. “It couldn’t have been here when
-we came.”
-
-“Why, no!” exclaimed Phœnix. “We should certainly have seen it either
-last night or this morning.”
-
-“No,” said Adam. “This boat hasn’t been here very long, and whoever
-came in it has gone off in our boat. It’s my belief they didn’t intend
-to come back to this little tub, for they’ve taken everything out of
-her. They’ve either coaxed your pardner to go with them, or they’ve
-carried him off.”
-
-Adam, who knew what desperate characters are occasionally found in
-this part of the State, where officers of the law seldom make their
-appearance, and where the few settlers and travellers are obliged
-to depend in a great measure upon themselves for the preservation
-of their lives and property, thought for a moment that if Chap had
-offered opposition to the persons who had taken the boat, there was a
-probability that he now lay at the bottom of the river. But he said
-nothing of this to the boys, and he tried to dismiss from his own mind
-the idea that anything so dreadful had happened.
-
-The people who lived and travelled on the Indian River were generally
-of a peaceful disposition, although lawless characters were sometimes
-to be met with, and he tried to believe that this was nothing but some
-wild freak, perhaps encouraged by the conduct of Chap.
-
-“I tell you what it is!” cried Adam. “Our boat’s gone up that small
-river we passed a mile or two below here. I don’t believe she’s had
-time to get out of sight on the main stream. I haven’t been away more’n
-an hour altogether, and there wasn’t any boat in sight when I left.
-What we’ve got to do is to take this boat and go after her.”
-
-“All right,” said the boys; and with a will the dirty little craft was
-pushed off, and the three scrambled in.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XII.
-
-CHAP LEADS THE INDIANS.
-
-
-It was not long before the Indian who had gone after his two hunting
-companions returned with them to the place where Chap and the Indian,
-whom we will call “The Talker,” were eating their mid-day meal.
-
-The new-comers were duly introduced to Chap, and expressed their
-willingness to take part in the expedition. Each of these men carried a
-rifle, and the smaller and more quiet of the two Indians whom Chap had
-first met was the only member of the party besides our friend who was
-not armed.
-
-Chap would have been very glad while leading this expedition to carry a
-weapon of some kind; but as there was no weapon for him, he resolved to
-cut a club as soon as he found a suitable limb or sapling.
-
-If he could get a whack at the two fellows who pushed him out of the
-boat, he felt that it would do him a great deal of good.
-
-The newly-arrived Indians having made a hasty meal, there was no time
-lost in starting. Chap placed himself at the head of the party, but he
-had not gone far before he felt obliged to relinquish that position.
-
-The path along which he had come, and which stretched out westwardly
-through the forest, was a path worn by persons walking from a
-landing-place on the tributary river to the spot on the main stream
-where our friends had made their camp of the night before, which was
-also a frequently used landing-place.
-
-But the woods now before our party were closely overgrown, and it
-required eyes better accustomed to the business than those of Chap’s to
-readily find the path.
-
-This passage through the woods was, when the size of the bend of the
-tributary river was considered, a short cut between the landing-places
-on the two streams; but it was, for all that, a long walk, and it was
-late in the afternoon when The Talker announced to Chap that they were
-approaching the bank of the other river.
-
-“How do we know that we are going to strike the river at the right
-place to meet the rascals?” asked Chap. “They may land on the opposite
-bank, and then we can’t get at them.”
-
-“Only one landin’-place ’long here,” said the Indian; “but just where
-we are goin’ to go. Ketch ’em there. You see. Just wait.”
-
-The Indians now called a halt, and after a few words among themselves,
-The Talker informed Chap that they had determined to remain where they
-were until after nightfall, because, if the men on the boat caught
-sight of any of them, they would suspect something, and would not land
-at all.
-
-“Sit down; rest,” said The Talker. “I’ll go see if boat has come along
-yit.”
-
-“I thought it wouldn’t do for you to show yourself,” said Chap, sitting
-down on a fallen tree-trunk, while the three Indians sat upon the
-ground.
-
-“Ain’t goin’ to look; goin’ to ask,” said The Talker, as he disappeared
-into a by-path, which Chap had not noticed before.
-
-In about half an hour The Talker returned, and, much to Chap’s
-surprise, he was accompanied by a young white girl, carrying a pail.
-
-“This is Mary Brown,” said The Talker.
-
-The three Indians then arose, and shook hands with Mary Brown, with
-whom they seemed to be very well acquainted.
-
-The young girl offered Chap her hand, and said, as she put down her
-pail,--
-
-“I’ve brought you some supper; I’d had you come up to the house, but he
-tells me,” pointing to The Talker, “that you don’t want to be seen.”
-
-“Do you live in these woods?” asked Chap, in amazement.
-
-“Yes,” said Mary Brown, “we live about half a mile back thar. ’Tain’t
-on the river, but it’s on high ground, with a clearin’ ’round it, so
-that people can be seen pretty plain from the water. He asked me if I’d
-seed a boat come up to-day, but I’m jist certain none has come up yit,
-for I’d been sure to see it. I’ve been watchin’ out for father. He’s
-gone up Indian River. I don’t ’spect him back to-day, but I might as
-well watch.”
-
-The girl took a piece of corn-bread from her pail, and gave it to Chap,
-and offered him the first choice of a plate of cold fried bacon. Chap
-was obliged to take this food in his fingers, but he was glad enough to
-get it, and said nothing about the absence of plates, knives, and forks.
-
-“I’ll bring you down some coffee after a while,” said Mary Brown, “but
-I hadn’t made any fire when that Indian came up to the house.”
-
-She gave the rest of the corn-bread and bacon to the Indians, and then
-came and sat down by Chap.
-
-“He tells me,” said she, “that some fellows have stole your boat, and
-that you’re goin’ to try to take it away from ’em again.”
-
-“That is what we started out to do,” said Chap, “but I’m very much
-afraid this plan won’t work. We are not even sure that the men who
-stole the boat came up this river, for I did not stay to see which way
-they went; and if they did come up this way, why should they land at
-the particular place where these Indians expect to find them, and to
-which there is a track right through the woods from the place where
-they stole the boat?”
-
-“You let these Indians alone,” said the girl, “for knowin’ jist what
-people are goin’ to do, ’specially fellers that are huntin’ and
-fishin’. I don’t reckon them boat-thieves ever heard thar was a good
-campin’-place up here, but they can’t help findin’ it out, for all the
-way up from the mouth of the river there’s nothin’ but reeds and swamps
-and ’gators; and when they git to the bit of hard, white sand down
-thar, which they can see ever so fur away, they’ll be sure to come to
-it. Everybody does who goes along this river,--that is, if they come
-up this fur. Of course, they may have turned ’round and gone back long
-ago, but you’ve got to take your chances of that. As for this track
-through the woods, I don’t suppose they know anything about it, and if
-they did, they wouldn’t ’spect you to find it. And now I must go up to
-the house, and look out for the boat. You and the Indians had better
-keep shady till I tell you whether it’s comin’ or not.”
-
-Mary Brown belonged to the class of people which in Florida are called
-“crackers.” These are poor whites, generally found in the half-settled
-portions of the State, who make a scanty living by fishing, hunting,
-and cultivating small patches of ground. They are usually uneducated.
-As a rule, they are an orderly people, and many of them are by nature
-intelligent and bright.
-
-Mary Brown had been thrown a good deal on her own resources, and she
-had learned to take a very common-sense view of the things that came
-under her observation. She wore a large sun-bonnet, and no shoes or
-stockings, and seemed afraid of nothing in the shape of man or beast
-which she might meet in the wild forest that surrounded her solitary
-home, where at present she was left with her mother and an old negro
-man, who acted as general helper about the place.
-
-When she had gone, the Indians sat talking among themselves, while Chap
-folded his arms and stood leaning against a tree.
-
-“I don’t half like the way things are going,” he said to himself. “It
-don’t seem to me that I’m exactly commanding this party, although I
-regularly hired them, and took them into my service. They’re doing
-everything just as they please, and I shouldn’t wonder if the whole
-thing should turn out a fizzle. But if we get a chance to do anything,
-I’ll soon let them know that I’m captain.”
-
-About fifteen minutes after this, Mary Brown came hurrying to them. She
-carried a tin-cup of hot coffee, sweetened, but with no milk in it,
-which she gave to Chap.
-
-“There’s a boat comin’ up the river,” she said, “and of course it’s
-your’n. Now you fellers lie low, and she’s bound to land on the beach
-down thar. I’ll go up on the high ground and keep a lookout,” and away
-she ran.
-
-It was growing dark in the woods, but in the cleared space around the
-Brown’s cabin it was light enough for the girl to see the boat come up
-the river, and steer directly for the sandy beach.
-
-When she returned and told the waiting party that the boat was about
-to make a landing, Chap, who had been much excited by the news that
-there was a sail in sight, seized the club he had cut in the woods, and
-addressed the Indians:
-
-“We must get along now to that landing-place, and the minute the boat
-touches the shore, we must make a rush at her and capture her.”
-
-“No, no,” said The Talker; “that won’t do. If they hear us while
-they’re in boat, they push off, up sail, and we never see ’em ag’in.
-Wait till they come ashore, then we fix ’em. No hurry.”
-
-Chap was obliged to acknowledge that this was good advice, but he
-contented himself with the determination that when the decisive moment
-came he would not let the Indians do all the fighting.
-
-“We will move quietly down toward the river,” he said, “and then, when
-we are sure the boat is tied up, and they are on shore, we’ll make a
-rush for them.”
-
-“All right,” said The Talker.
-
-And slowly and cautiously the party, followed at a little distance by
-Mary Brown, made its way in the direction of the river.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIII.
-
-ADAM LEADS HIS PARTY.
-
-
-Adam and the two boys had not sailed very far in the dirty little boat,
-when they found out why the persons who had been using her had left her
-and taken The Rolling Stone in her place.
-
-This little boat, on the stern of which was painted the name “Maggie,”
-was very leaky, and required continual bailing. Her sailing tackle
-was out of order, and she was a very undesirable boat. But Phœnix and
-Phil bailed away bravely with a couple of tin cans which they found on
-board, and Adam, having steered into the mouth of the smaller river,
-put the boat before the wind and sailed along at a good rate.
-
-The stream they were now in twisted and wound a good deal, and they
-could not see very far ahead, but every moment they hoped to come in
-sight of The Rolling Stone.
-
-“I cannot imagine,” said Phil, “why Chap should have gone off in
-that boat. If it was taken away from him, or borrowed, I should have
-supposed he would stay behind to tell us what had become of her.”
-
-“If it was took by unfair means,” said Adam, “he’d be very likely to
-think he ought to stick by her to the last, and if they took her they’d
-have to take him. P’raps they were only goin’ a little way up this
-river, and he’s undertook to bring her back.”
-
-“If he does, he’ll upset her,” said Phœnix.
-
-“If that’s so,” said Adam, “we’ll come across her bottom up, and the
-young chap sittin’ on her keel.”
-
-“And all our things in the river,” said Phil.
-
-“That’ll be about it,” quietly replied Adam, hoping from the bottom of
-his heart that nothing worse than this had happened.
-
-About four o’clock, as they rounded a bend in the river, Phil, who was
-standing by the mast, gave a shout.
-
-“A sail ahead!” he cried.
-
-And, sure enough, about a mile ahead a boat was plainly to be seen.
-
-“That’s her!” cried Adam. “Now, boys, load up that gun with buckshot,
-six in each barrel, and we’ll keep after her as long as she’s above
-water.”
-
-“The Rolling Stone is a great deal faster than this old thing,” said
-Phœnix, “and I’m afraid we’ll never catch up with her.”
-
-“We’ve gained on her now,” said Adam, “for she must have been a good
-deal ahead of us when we started. There isn’t much wind up here, with
-these high trees on each side, and that boat needs a good breeze to
-make her do her best. If the wind goes down altogether toward sunset,
-and we have to pole, I’d rather have this boat than that.”
-
-Adam now gave his utmost attention to making the best of the breeze,
-and as he was a better sailor than the men in The Rolling Stone, and
-as the Maggie could make a fair headway with less wind than the larger
-boat, she gradually gained upon the latter.
-
-“Look here,” said Phil, who, while Phœnix was still bailing away, had
-been gazing earnestly ahead, “there are only two men on board that
-boat, and I’m certain that neither of them is Chap.”
-
-Phœnix started as he heard these words, and involuntarily looked up at
-Adam. The sailor said not a word, but his face seemed to have grown
-hard and dark, and his hand fastened itself upon the tiller with a
-nervous grip, as if he wished to animate the vessel with his own fierce
-anxiety to hasten on.
-
-The young men in the other boat evidently knew that they were pursued,
-and were doing all that they could to get away.
-
-If there had been a fair wind, The Rolling Stone would have left the
-other boat far behind; but it soon happened that the Maggie had greatly
-the advantage.
-
-A portion of the river was now reached where, although the stream was
-very wide, the water was not over five feet deep, and the bottom, which
-seemed to be made up entirely of oyster-beds, could plainly be seen.
-
-One of the men on The Rolling Stone was already using a pole to assist
-the progress of the boat; but when Adam called Phil to the tiller and
-seized the pole which lay on the deck of the Maggie, it soon became
-evident that a small boat was much better than a larger one, when each
-was pushed through the water by means of a pole.
-
-Adam was a strong man and accustomed to hard work, and his vigorous
-efforts made the Maggie glide so fast through the water that she
-rapidly gained upon the foremost boat.
-
-As the two were about a dozen yards apart Adam told Phœnix to stand
-ready to lay hold of the other boat when they should touch.
-
-Phil held the gun, but Adam cautioned him not to be too quick in using
-it.
-
-When the boats were quite near each other, the young man who had been
-poling The Rolling Stone dropped his pole, and picking up a gun, raised
-it to his shoulder. But this did not frighten the valiant Adam.
-
-“Put down that gun!” he roared, as the two boats touched.
-
-The young man who had been steering now rose to his feet. His gun was
-probably not loaded, for he did not attempt to pick it up, although it
-lay near him.
-
-The two fellows looked sullenly at the party in the other boat, but
-they must have felt that it would be of no use to offer battle.
-
-Adam had picked up a hatchet; Phil had a double-barrelled gun, and
-a glance at the strong figure of Phœnix, who stood with his sleeves
-rolled up and his shirt thrown open, was enough to make any one feel
-that a tussle with such a fellow was not a thing to be desired.
-
-Their opponents were three to their two, and looked like fellows
-determined to win. It would not pay to fight, and the untidy young man
-with the gun lowered his weapon.
-
-Instantly Adam sprang on board The Rolling Stone.
-
-“Where’s the boy who was on this boat?” he cried.
-
-“He went ashore when we traded,” was the answer. “Didn’t he tell you
-so?”
-
-“We haven’t seen him,” said Adam. “Now, if you fellers lie to me, I’ll
-split your heads open with this hatchet. I’ll have no foolin’. Where is
-he?”
-
-The young men looked at each other. They were evidently surprised that
-the boy from whom they had taken The Rolling Stone had not been seen
-by his companions. They supposed, of course, that he had told them all
-about the affair.
-
-“I tell you,” said one of them, “we’re not foolin’. He went right
-ashore after we had traded boats.”
-
-“Traded boats!” cried Phil, who had laid down his gun. “What do you
-mean by that?”
-
-“Why, your pardner said you folks only wanted a boat to get up the
-river, and as this one is to be took back to Brewer, we traded.”
-
-“I don’t believe a word of it!” cried Phil and Phœnix, almost in a
-breath.
-
-“It’s a lie on the face of it,” said Adam, stepping up to the last
-speaker and lifting his hatchet. “Now, if you scoundrels don’t want to
-be brained right here, you’d better speak out and tell the truth. You
-stole the boat, and we know it.”
-
-“I didn’t say the young man was altogether willin’ to trade, but we did
-trade. Didn’t we leave our boat? and haven’t you got it? We was a-goin’
-to leave all your things for you, but your pardner, as soon as he went
-ashore, began a-hollerin’ for you all, and we thought you’d be firin’
-at us the next minute, and so we had to put off.”
-
-“You meant to steal this boat and everything in it,” said Adam, “and
-you made that young man go ashore.”
-
-“We told him he’d better,” said the other.
-
-“Yes,” added his companion; “but he got mad, and the minute he set foot
-on the sand, he ran into the woods a-hollerin’ for you all.”
-
-Phœnix had said little during this time, but his feelings were rapidly
-reaching the boiling-point. At this moment he sprang on board The
-Rolling Stone, and, seizing one of the young men by the collar, he
-shouted,--
-
-“If I hear any more of that talk, you’re going overboard. Where is the
-boy that was on this boat?”
-
-The young man thus suddenly attacked raised his arm to defend himself,
-but Adam pushed between the two.
-
-“Don’t fight yet,” he said to Phœnix. “We’ll see directly what’s to be
-done to ’em.”
-
-This remark frightened the two rascals more than anything that had
-been yet said or done. It seemed to indicate a determination to
-inflict some sort of punishment upon them, and if these three excited
-persons believed that their companion had been made away with, there
-was nothing to prevent them from taking summary vengeance upon their
-captives, and throwing their bodies to the alligators. On these lonely
-waters they could expect no help.
-
-“I tell you,” said one of the young men, very earnestly, “it’s all
-truth that we’ve been sayin’. The whole thing was a lark, and we
-wouldn’t ’a’ done it if we hadn’t been drinkin’. We was a-sayin’ just
-before we seed you comin’ after us that we was sorry we took your boat,
-and if there was a good wind to-morrer, we’d overhaul you and give her
-back to you. We haven’t hurt none of your things, and we’ve fed your
-little bears with the milk we brought along for ourselves.”
-
-“Yes,” said Adam, grimly; “that’s because you wanted to raise ’em and
-sell ’em.”
-
-“No,” said the other. “We was a-goin’ to give ’em back to you.”
-
-No answer was made to this palpable falsehood, and every one seemed to
-hesitate before making the next move. Then Adam spoke up.
-
-“We’ve got to talk this thing over,” said he to Phil and Phœnix. Then,
-turning to the untidy young men, he told them to get into their own
-boat, and pull her out of ear-shot. “And mind you don’t try to get
-away,” he added, as the fellows scrambled into the Maggie; “for if you
-do I’ll put a dozen buckshot into you before you know it.”
-
-One of the young men poled his boat away until Adam called to him to
-stop, and then our three friends sat down to talk the matter over.
-There was a gentle current in the stream, and the two boats floated
-slowly along without diminishing the distance between them.
-
-“What do you both think about it?” asked Phil, nervously.
-
-“I think they are a pair of scoundrels,” said Phœnix, “and they ought
-to be knocked on the head.”
-
-“We can’t do that,” said Adam, “though I’d shoot ’em quick enough if it
-had to be done to save any of us; but I feel pretty sure that Chap’s
-all right, though the story of these fellers is an out-and-out lie.
-They just took the boat from him, and made off with it, and that’s all
-there is about it.”
-
-“One part of their story seemed probable,” said Phil, “and that was
-that Chap got mad and bolted into the woods after us. He isn’t the
-fellow to stand still and see his property taken off without making a
-fuss.”
-
-“No, indeed!” added Phœnix, earnestly.
-
-“If their story is true,” said Adam, “and Chap ran into the woods after
-us, he must have taken the wrong track, or we would have seen him.
-There is a path which leads to the left not very far from the beach.”
-
-“Yes,” said Phil, “Phœnix and I noticed that, and debated a little
-which way we should go, and finally concluded to keep to the right.”
-
-“Yes,” said Adam, “that’s what he must ’a’ done, and that’s the way we
-missed him. I don’t believe them fellers did anything to him. There
-couldn’t ’a’ been any need of it, for I ’spect they sneaked off with
-the boat while he was on shore.”
-
-“And what are we going to do about it?” said Phœnix. “Let them off
-scot-free while we go back after Chap?”
-
-“Well,” said Adam, “we can’t very well kill the rascals, and it
-wouldn’t pay to hold on to ’em. The best thing we can do is to get rid
-of ’em as soon as we can.”
-
-“And then go back after Chap,” suggested Phœnix.
-
-“I don’t know about that,” said Adam, a little absently.
-
-He was looking at Phil, and noticed that the boy was very pale and
-silent, and that he sat doubled up as if he felt weak and tired.
-
-Not one of the party had eaten anything since breakfast. They had been
-so excited and so eager to overtake the stolen boat, and find out what
-had become of Chap, that the thought of food had not entered their
-minds. Phœnix and Adam were both very robust, and the omission of a
-single meal had not affected them; but Phil, although he was a healthy
-fellow, was not so hardy and so capable of sustaining privations as his
-companions, and Adam could see that he was really faint for want of
-food.
-
-“I don’t think we’ll make anything by startin’ back now,” he said.
-“It’ll be dark in an hour or two, and then we couldn’t sail on this
-crooked river, and we’d have to anchor and wait for mornin’. We
-couldn’t land and make a fire and have anything hot and comfortable for
-supper, for there isn’t a spot we’ve passed where we could go ashore.
-But I see a bit of sandy beach way up ahead there, and there we can
-land and boil some coffee, and have a good meal, and I’m sure we all
-need it.”
-
-“But what about poor Chap all this time?” asked Phil, looking up.
-
-“Oh, I haven’t forgot Chap!” said Adam; “and I don’t think we need
-be troubled about him. When he got down to the beach he’d know that
-we’d gone off in the boat that was left there, and that we’d come back
-ag’in. He’d be sure to go and look for the house when he felt hungry,
-and as he wouldn’t take the wrong track the second time, he’d find it
-easy enough. There’s no gittin’ really lost in them woods, for there’s
-no gittin’ out of the beaten tracks, and they always lead somewhere.
-So it stands to reason he’s better off than we are, as far as comfort
-goes. And we can’t get to him till to-morrer, no matter when we start.
-So I say we’ll go up there to that beach and have our supper. I don’t
-want either one of you sick on my hands, for that would be the worst
-thing that could happen.”
-
-“But what about those two fellows?” asked Phœnix.
-
-“We’d better let them get out of sight just as fast as they can,” said
-Adam. “If they can’t find any place to camp it’ll serve ’em right. It’s
-not our business to make ’em comfortable, and they can’t stay where we
-are. So I say let’s put their things on their old boat and tell them to
-make themselves scarce.”
-
-The boys both agreed that in regard to Chap and the two untidy young
-men there did not seem to be anything to do but to follow Adam’s
-advice. The Maggie was, therefore, hailed and ordered to come alongside.
-
-“Now, look here,” said Adam to the two men; “you’ve got to get out of
-this just as fast as you can, for we’ve agreed that we can’t keep our
-hands off o’ you more’n half an hour longer. We’ll give you back your
-dirty things, for we don’t want none of your property. But I’m not
-goin’ to give you back your guns, for one of ’em is a rifle, an’ you’re
-just the fellers to take a crack at us after you got out of range of
-our shot-gun. I’ll leave the guns for you at Titusville, at the hotel.
-You can’t have ’em while we’re on the river.”
-
-The young men demurred very much at being deprived of their firearms,
-but Adam’s determination was not moved, and they were obliged to go
-away and leave their guns on The Rolling Stone.
-
-The wind served them better going down the stream than coming up, and
-so, with pole and sail, and the assistance of the current, they soon
-put a good distance between themselves and the other boat, feeling in
-their hearts that if they did not make haste enough, a ball from their
-own rifle might overtake them. They were so cowardly themselves that
-they expected every one else to be so.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIV.
-
-CHAP’S AMBASSADOR.
-
-
-The stretch of white sand, of which Adam had spoken, was so far away
-that neither of the boys had noticed it; but the practised eyes of the
-sailor had singled it out as a place where a landing could be made, and
-toward it The Rolling Stone was now steered, Phœnix taking the tiller,
-and Adam using the pole whenever he could.
-
-Phil was ordered to refresh himself with some crackers and cold meat,
-as it would be some time before they could have their coffee.
-
-“I’m not going to eat anything,” said Phœnix, “till we have cooked a
-regular supper; but I tell you it’s jolly to think of getting something
-good and hot when we land.”
-
-“That’s so,” said Adam.
-
-And Phil assented heartily. But not one of them imagined how hot a
-thing was waiting for them.
-
-The Rolling Stone thus moving slowly up the river, gradually came into
-sight of the keen-eyed maiden, who surveyed the water from the high
-ground in the vicinity of the Browns’ cabin, and, as we have seen, she
-informed Chap and his companions of its approach.
-
-When the boat at last touched the shore, it was still light by the
-river, and Chap and the Indians were well concealed in the dusky
-recesses of the forest, not far from the water; and over the underbrush
-and between the trees Chap could catch sight of the little red pennant,
-made from an old handkerchief which he himself had hoisted to the
-topmast of The Rolling Stone.
-
-The sight made him furious to rush down and recapture his boat; but the
-others restrained him. It was not time yet. The fellows must have no
-chance to push off and get away.
-
-“Look here,” said Mary Brown, who had closely followed Chap’s party, “I
-wish there wasn’t goin’ to be a fight. I’d hate to see people killed so
-near our house. I’ve been thinkin’ of a good thing to do, and I’ll tell
-you what it is. I’ll go down and talk to them fellers. They won’t be
-scared off when they see a girl comin’, and then I’ll just tell ’em the
-whole thing. I’ll tell ’em there are five of you here, and you’re bound
-to have the boat back, and they might as well give it up first as last,
-and not have nobody shot.”
-
-“And as soon as you began to talk that way,” said Chap, “they’d all
-jump aboard and push off.”
-
-“No, they wouldn’t,” said the girl; “for I wouldn’t talk to ’em if they
-wasn’t all ashore, and the minute any of ’em started to go aboard, I’d
-give a scream, and then you all could come peltin’ down.”
-
-“And what would we do with them,” asked Chap, a little contemptuously,
-“if they agreed to all that? Let them walk off, scot-free?”
-
-“There ain’t no use a-doin’ anythin’ to ’em,” said Mary Brown, “when
-you’ve got your boat. That’s all you want.”
-
-The Indians, who understood all that Mary Brown said, and had listened
-to her with great attention, now expressed themselves as well satisfied
-with the plan she proposed. If the men would give up the boat without
-fighting, what was the good of fighting? But this did not satisfy Chap.
-
-“I want the rascals punished,” he said.
-
-“Humph!” said The Talker. “S’pose you first one shot. Won’t do you no
-good then to lick ’em.”
-
-“They won’t believe you,” said Chap to Mary, “when you tell them there
-are five of us. They’ll think it a trick.”
-
-“That’s their lookout,” said the girl. “If they don’t believe me, you
-can pitch into ’em; but you oughter try first to do without fightin’.”
-
-Finding that his companions were very unwilling to resort to violence,
-if the boat could be regained peacefully, Chap was obliged to submit,
-and Mary Brown started off to treat for a surrender of The Rolling
-Stone.
-
-“Mind,” she said, as she left, “if they cut up, or try to get back into
-their boat, I’ll scream, and then you all come.”
-
-“Oh, we’ll come quick enough!” said Chap, clutching his club. “You
-needn’t be afraid of that.”
-
-When Mary Brown went out on the river-beach, she saw only Adam and
-Phil, for Phœnix had gone up the shore to look for dry sticks for the
-fire. She walked up to our two friends, who were quite surprised to see
-her, not knowing that there was any habitation in the neighborhood, and
-after wishing them “good-evening,” she related to them the purpose of
-her mission.
-
-While she was speaking, Phœnix came up, and his appearance made her
-quite uneasy. She had supposed there were only two persons in the
-boat, but if there were three, it would make the fight a great deal
-worse, if there should be one, and she therefore urged, with increased
-earnestness, that they should give up the boat peaceably, before they
-were set upon by the determined men in the woods.
-
-“Give us a moment to think this over,” said Adam, when she had finished.
-
-And the girl retired to a short distance, while our friends drew close
-together in anxious consultation.
-
-“Those two rascals,” said Adam, “must have waded ashore somewhere, and
-come across these Indians. And now they’re a-goin’ to try to take the
-boat from us. They’ve had time enough to get around here, for we came
-up very slow.”
-
-“Perhaps it’s all a made-up story,” said Phœnix.
-
-“That couldn’t be,” said Phil, “for how would that girl know that we
-had taken the boat from anybody?”
-
-“Whether her story is true or not,” said Adam, “we’re not goin’ to give
-up the boat, are we?”
-
-“No, indeed!” answered both of the boys.
-
-“I’m glad we took the guns from them fellers,” said Adam, “for now
-we’ve each got one. Let’s jump aboard and get the shootin’-irons.
-That’s the first thing to do.”
-
-The three now moved toward the boat, which had been drawn up in shallow
-water.
-
-“Don’t go aboard yit!” exclaimed Mary, quickly stepping toward them;
-but, as no attention was paid to her words, she gave a loud scream, and
-ran into the woods.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XV.
-
-THE FORCES MEET.
-
-
-It so happened that the three guns on The Rolling Stone were all
-loaded, and as they sprang on board, Adam, Phil, and Phœnix each
-snatched up one of them.
-
-“Cover yourselves and be ready!” cried Adam.
-
-And, at these words, Phil bounced into the little cabin and put his gun
-out the landward window; Phœnix stepped on the little strip of deck on
-the other side of the cabin, and crouching behind it, rested his gun
-upon the roof, while Adam threw himself flat down on the bottom of the
-boat and pointed his gun over the side.
-
-“Cock your guns,” cried Adam, “but don’t fire till I give the word. I
-hear ’em comin’.”
-
-The moment that Mary Brown’s scream was heard, Chap sprang toward the
-river, followed by the four Indians.
-
-“Hold back!” cried The Talker. “You take care! You be shot!”
-
-But Chap paid no attention to this warning. His only idea was to rush
-upon the two marauders and whang them over the head with his club.
-
-It was now almost dark in the woods, but on the water and the
-river-beach objects could be easily seen.
-
-The Talker thrust his gun into the hands of the unarmed Indian, and
-making a dash at Chap, he seized him around the waist just as he was
-about to rush out into the open.
-
-“That no way to fight,” he cried. “You be shot.”
-
-Encircling the boy with his strong arms, he held him back. Then,
-speaking to one of the other Indians, he told him to peep out and see
-how matters stood.
-
-The Indian quickly reported that the men were in the boat, and had
-their guns levelled at the shore.
-
-“Bad rascals,” said The Talker. “Goin’ to try kill somebody and keep
-boat. You hold him,” continued The Talker, giving Chap into the custody
-of one of the other Indians, “and we go fix ’em.”
-
-Taking his gun again, The Talker and two of his companions stepped to
-the edge of the woods, where each immediately slipped behind a tree.
-
-“Let me go!” cried Chap, while struggling with the Indian who was
-holding him. “I’m captain of this party, and you’ve no right to keep me
-back.”
-
-To this appeal the Indian made no answer, but Held on vigorously to the
-wrathful boy.
-
-“There went three of ’em behind them trees,” said Adam. “I know they’re
-Indians by the way they move, and they’ve got guns. The white fellers
-are keepin’ back.”
-
-“That’s because we’ve got their guns,” cried Phil, from the cabin.
-
-“They’d do it anyhow,” said Adam,--“the cowards! These Indians’ll be
-bad customers and hard to hit. Don’t fire if they don’t come out, and
-keep yourselves as well covered as you kin.”
-
-The Talker now shouted from behind his tree,--
-
-“Come ashore! Give up boat! We let you off!”
-
-The impudence of this demand exasperated the boys, and Phil, now
-strengthened by excitement and his meal of cold meat and crackers, sent
-back a shout of defiance. But Adam exclaimed,--
-
-“Keep quiet! ’Tain’t no use to waste breath on ’em. Let’s see what
-they’ll do next.”
-
-Again The Talker shouted that if they didn’t get out of that boat, and
-give it up, he and his men would come down and take it.
-
-“All right!” said Adam to the boys. “As long as they stick behind them
-trees, we couldn’t hit ’em, even if ’twas daylight, but if they rush
-down on us we can fire at ’em as quick as we please, and the law’ll
-stand by us, for we’ve got a right to fight for our property when
-there’s nobody to do it for us. So let ’em come, if they want to.”
-
-But the Indians behind the trees did not seem inclined to do anything
-in a hurry.
-
-They might have fired at the people on the boat, and, perhaps, have
-hit them, for they were not perfectly protected, nor were their
-defences bullet-proof; but although these Indians, in this wild
-country, were, in a measure, outside the pale of the law, they knew
-that to deliberately shoot human beings, who had so far offered them no
-violence, would be very much like a murder.
-
-They had not expected to meet a party so well armed, and ready to
-protect themselves, for they had expected to rush in between the
-marauders and their stolen boat, and, by their superiority and numbers,
-to effect a speedy victory.
-
-They spoke to each other from tree to tree, and it is possible that
-they contemplated waiting until night had really set in, when, under
-cover of the darkness, they could slip down and capture the boat
-without so much danger of being shot.
-
-But Chap was out of all patience with this ridiculous delay.
-
-“What’s the good of standing there and hollerin’,” he said, “instead of
-going down and doing something? The first thing you know those fellows
-will push the boat off, and get away with her.”
-
-“Don’t be ’fraid,” said the Indian who still held him. “We keep eye on
-’em. No get ’way.”
-
-But Chap’s active mind and body could not be content with talk like
-this. With a sudden and powerful wrench he broke away from the Indian
-who was holding him, and, brandishing his club, he rushed out upon the
-beach.
-
-He would show them what to do. If he dashed down upon the boat, the
-Indians were bound to follow, and the rascals would be overpowered in a
-second.
-
-The moment he appeared upon the beach, three guns were levelled at him,
-and three nervous fingers trembled upon the triggers.
-
-Suddenly Phil, who happened to have the rifle, dropped the muzzle
-of his piece, and, raising his head, looked boldly out of the cabin
-window. At the same instant Phœnix’s head popped up from behind the
-cabin, and Adam sprang to his feet.
-
-Then from all three came the single word,--
-
-“Chap!”
-
-On hearing his name pronounced by these familiar voices, Chap stopped
-suddenly and lowered his club. Then, without reflecting that they were
-exposing themselves to the aim of the ruthless red men, Phil, Adam, and
-Phœnix sprang from the boat, the two boys in their excitement leaving
-their guns on board, and rushing toward their stupefied companion.
-
-The Indians, seeing their ally thus set upon, were inclined to fire,
-but, apart from the probability of their hitting Chap, there was
-something so peculiar in his attitude, and in the actions of those who
-had rushed upon him, that they forbore.
-
-Running down to the group on the beach, they reached it in time to see
-Chap dancing about, and apparently shaking hands with all three of his
-friends at once, while myriads of questions, without any answers to
-balance them, flew wildly about in every direction.
-
-The Indians, amazed at this strange scene, stood silently looking on,
-while Mary Brown, who had been hidden somewhere in the woods, came down
-and listened with open mouth and eyes.
-
-It was at least five minutes before Chap or his friends could get
-fairly started in an explanation of what had happened. At last, through
-the rattling noise of question, answer, and exclamation, the stories
-were straightened out, and everybody, even the Indians, began to
-understand what had really happened, and how it had come to pass.
-
-“Well,” cried Phil, “you ought to be thankful, Chap, for your legs.”
-
-“Legs?” said Chap.
-
-“Yes,” answered Phil, laughing. “The moment I got a good sight of them,
-I remembered that besides Chap Webster, there wasn’t another fellow of
-fifteen with a thirty-year old pair of legs.”
-
-“I saw ’twas a boy, too,” said Adam, “and he skipped down in a way that
-seemed to me mighty nat’ral to somebody.”
-
-“They are a good pair of legs,” said Chap, looking down at his long
-extremities, “and they often come in handy.”
-
-“Now then,” cried Adam, “we’ll build a fire and have our supper as soon
-as we can, and we’ll do the rest of our talkin’ while we are eatin’.”
-
-It was almost too dark now to find firewood, but everybody helped to
-look for it.
-
-One of the Indians went to a spring near by for water. Very soon a
-bright fire was blazing upon the beach, a potful of coffee was bubbling
-on the coals, while a pan of bacon sizzled near by.
-
-There was enough for all, and everybody was invited to the repast, the
-cups, saucers, and plates from The Rolling Stone being made to do as
-much duty as possible.
-
-Mary Brown declined to stay to supper.
-
-“Mother’ll be a-wonderin’ what’s become of me,” she said, “and she
-can’t send old Job down to see, cos she don’t want to be left by
-herself. I’m mighty glad you didn’t have a fight, but I was so afeard
-you was goin’ to be shot,” she said, addressing Chap, “that I jist
-clapped my sun-bonnet down over my eyes, and I didn’t know nothin’ what
-happened till I looked up and see you all dancin’ round and shakin’
-hands. If any of you want anything to help camp, you can come up to the
-house and see if you can git it.”
-
-And then with a nod which seemed to be made to the party in general,
-the girl ran home.
-
-After half an hour of talk, our friends stowed themselves away in
-the cabin of The Rolling Stone, and the Indians made themselves as
-comfortable as possible on the sand at the edge of the woods.
-
-The sand was dry, the air was mild, and these hardy red men were very
-glad to have a bed so smooth and soft.
-
-“It is awful funny,” said Chap, before he went to sleep, “to think that
-I was leading a band of Indians through the woods to pounce down on you
-fellows. And yet, when I come to think of it, I wasn’t leading them so
-very much, either. Seems to me the people down this way don’t have the
-right idea of what a captain ought to be.”
-
-“Do you mean us?” said Phil, who shared the narrow bed.
-
-“Well, I don’t know,” answered Chap. “Your notions do seem to be a
-little loose; but I guess I’ll get you better disciplined after a
-while.”
-
-“All right,” said Phil.
-
-And he went to sleep.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVI.
-
-MARY BROWN SENDS A MESSAGE.
-
-
-The next morning every one was up and stirring long before sunrise. The
-Indians were well satisfied with a dollar apiece for their services,
-which had been truly valuable, for they had conducted Chap right into
-the arms of his friends, although the undertaking had been accompanied
-by great danger to all concerned, and they took a hasty breakfast and
-started off to continue their hunting expedition.
-
-While the boys and Adam were still eating their morning meal, Mary
-Brown came down to the river. She had a clean sun-bonnet and wore shoes
-and stockings. These seemed to interfere a good deal with her comfort
-in walking; but it was quite evident that she had dressed herself in
-her best for this visit, and most people are willing to sacrifice some
-comfort when they wish to look very well, indeed.
-
-“Mother says she would have come down to see you,” said Mary Brown;
-“but she’s got the rheumatism in her knee-bones, and can’t walk much.
-She wanted to see you all, for there ain’t many people who come here,
-and when they do come, they’re pretty rough.”
-
-“I think we look pretty rough,” said Phil, smiling, as he glanced
-around at the blue shirts and travel-stained garments of his companions.
-
-“Clothes ain’t everything,” said Mary; “but if thar was a church here,
-you’d do to go.”
-
-“Where _do_ you go to church?” asked Chap, as he rose from his
-breakfast.
-
-“Me?” said Mary Brown, with a smile. “Why, I was never at church in my
-life.”
-
-Chap looked surprised, and although the others were gathering up the
-breakfast things and preparing to depart, he continued to talk to Mary
-Brown.
-
-The girl had been very kind to him. Besides this, she interested him.
-He had never before met with a young person of that kind.
-
-“Have you never been anywhere but just here?” he asked.
-
-“Oh, yes,” said she. “I’ve been up Indian River two or three times to
-Cooper’s store with father, and once I went up to Titusville, but that
-was a long time ago. I only remember that it was a great big place,
-with lots of houses and ever so many people. There may have been girls
-there, but I don’t remember seein’ any of ’em.”
-
-“It must be dreadful to live in these woods always,” said Chap.
-
-“There’s nothin’ dreadful about it,” replied Mary Brown. “The b’ars and
-wild-cats and painters won’t trouble you if you don’t trouble ’em, and
-the Indians that come along sometimes is just the same as tame white
-men. But I would kind o’ like to see other places. Father’s travelled
-about a good deal, and he’s telled me a lot of what he seed. He once
-went up to Jacksonville, and he’s been to Tallahassee, and in some of
-the places he says there are so many houses that they touch each other.
-But I always thought he was makin’ fun when he told me this. Why, when
-you had muddy feet, you’d either have to walk right through your house,
-or else go round the whole town to get to your back door. I can’t
-believe town-people is such fools as that.”
-
-Chap laughed.
-
-“I wish you could see a good big city for yourself,” said he.
-
-“I’d like to,” replied the girl; and then changing the conversation,
-she asked, “Have you got a sister?”
-
-“Yes,” said Chap,--“one.”
-
-“What is her name?”
-
-“Helen,” answered Chap.
-
-“Can she read?” asked the girl.
-
-“Oh, yes,” said Chap.
-
-“And write, too, I s’pose?”
-
-“Yes,” was the reply, “she can do all that.”
-
-“I’d like something awfully much,” said Mary Brown, “and I don’t reckon
-it ’ud be real bothersome to anybody who knows how to write already.
-I wish, after you git home, you’d ask your sister to write me a small
-letter. I never got a letter in all my life. I can’t read, but father’d
-read it to me.”
-
-“She’ll do it,” said Chap, warmly. “I know she will. But where shall
-she direct it? She can’t send a letter here.”
-
-“Oh, there’s a post-office at Cooper’s store,” said the girl, “and when
-father goes thar, they tells him if there’s a letter thar for him.”
-
-Phœnix now called to Chap that they were nearly ready to start.
-
-“Good-by!” said Chap, holding out his hand. “You’ve been a real trump,
-and I’ll make Helen write you a letter. She’ll tell you just how we got
-home.”
-
-Adam and the other boys now came up, and shook hands with Mary Brown.
-There had been some talk at breakfast of offering to pay her for the
-provisions she had furnished the night before, but now it had been
-determined not to do so for fear of offending her. She had evidently
-offered what she had out of pure good will.
-
-As The Rolling Stone was pushed off, Mary Brown stood upon the beach
-and watched the departing boat.
-
-“Don’t you forget the letter,” she called after Chap.
-
-“No, indeed!” shouted Chap, heartily. “You needn’t be afraid of that.”
-
-“Goin’ to write to her?” asked Adam, with a grin.
-
-“No, I’m not,” said Chap, his face flushing a little, “but my sister
-Helen is. It’ll be a piece of out-and-out charity. That poor girl never
-got a letter in her life.”
-
-“How are you going to send it?” asked Phœnix. “Per alligator?”
-
-“No,” said Chap; “per land-shark; the man who keeps the store up the
-river.”
-
-The girl stood on the beach until the boat was nearly out of sight. She
-then took off her shoes and stockings, and walked slowly homeward.
-
-“I wish he’d brought his sister with him,” she said to herself, as she
-plodded along toward the lonely house. “If I could ’a’ had jist one
-look at another girl ’twould ’a’ been something.”
-
-“I hope we’ll get to that store of Cooper’s early in the afternoon,”
-said Adam, “for if we don’t my little bears’ll be out of milk ag’in.”
-
-“That will be too bad,” said Phil, “for they’ve got on splendidly so
-far. No matter what happened to the boat, they’ve always had their
-regular meals.”
-
-“Yes,” said Adam, “them rascals ’spected to make money out of these
-bears, and they fed ’em up first-rate, but that’s the only good thing
-they did do. They’ve made us lose pretty nigh two whole days, besides
-comin’ within an inch of havin’ a reg’lar battle among ourselves. That
-was about the last thing I thought could happen.”
-
-“I suppose that part of it was my fault,” said Chap. “I oughtn’t to
-have tried to get back the boat without letting you know about it.”
-
-“It was just as much my fault,” said Phil. “If I hadn’t gone off, and
-taken Phœnix, those fellows wouldn’t have tried to run off with the
-boat.”
-
-“If it comes to that,” remarked Adam, “you might as well say it was my
-fault; for if I hadn’t them little bears, and gone to get milk for ’em,
-nothin’ would ’a’ happened. But I say it’s nobody’s fault. We all did
-the best we could, and there’s the end of it.”
-
-When our party reached the main stream, they found a fair wind blowing
-from the east. This was very favorable for them, and they reached
-Cooper’s store about the middle of the afternoon.
-
-“By the way,” said Phil, “it’s rather curious that we didn’t overtake
-that dirty little Maggie, with the two boat-thieves aboard.”
-
-“I reckon,” said Phœnix, “that as soon as she got out of that small
-river she went down-stream, instead of going up, as we did; but she
-must have made pretty good time to get out into Indian River before us;
-for, of course, she couldn’t sail at night.”
-
-“No,” said Adam, “but they started a good deal earlier than we did.
-They didn’t stop to cook breakfast and bid good-by to girls.”
-
-“Neither did we,” cried Chap, promptly,--“that is, we only waited for
-breakfast. I didn’t keep you waiting a minute.”
-
-“That’s so,” said Adam; “and as to that Maggie, I am pretty sure I saw
-her when we got out into this river. She was about two miles down the
-stream on the other side, with her sail down, and most likely anchored.”
-
-“What was she doing there?” asked Phœnix.
-
-“My ’pinion is,” said Adam, “that she was lyin’ there waitin’ for us to
-come out. I think them fellers intend to follow us up to Titusville,
-keepin’ out of our way as much as they kin. You see we’ve got their
-guns, and they can’t do much till they get ’em.”
-
-“I wish they had their old guns,” said Phil, “and were sailing down the
-Indian River. I don’t think it’s very pleasant to have such fellows
-sneaking after us.”
-
-“I wish they had their guns, too,” said Adam, “and if I was only sure
-they’d sail straight down the river, I’d go in for givin’ ’em back to
-’em. But I don’t trust ’em. They’re mean, cowardly scoundrels, and if
-they could take a crack at us with that rifle afore they went down the
-river, they’d be quick enough to do it.”
-
-“They haven’t anything to complain of,” said Phil, “for I’m sure we
-treated them a great deal better than they deserved, or had any right
-to expect.”
-
-“I should say so,” cried Chap, vehemently. “If I’d been along, they
-wouldn’t have got off so easily. Just imagine their pushing me
-slam-bang into the water right off our own boat. It makes me boil over
-to think of it. If ever I get a chance, I’ll pay them up for that.”
-
-“I don’t suppose you ever will get a chance,” said Phœnix; “but if you
-do, you’d better let them alone. You are rid of them now, and you ought
-to be glad of it.”
-
-“It seems to me, Phœnix,” said Chap, “that you are always telling
-fellows to keep peaceable, and yet, whenever there’s a chance to fight,
-you are the very first one to pitch in.”
-
-Phœnix hesitated for a moment, and then he said,--
-
-“Sometimes things are different from what they are at other times.”
-
-“All right,” said Chap. “Those rascals are out of sight and reach now,
-and I’ll be as peaceable as anybody; but if ever I get within three
-feet of them, things will be different.”
-
-And here the conversation on the subject closed.
-
-“I think you are right, Adam,” said Phil. “It wouldn’t be safe to let
-those fellows have their guns till we are off this river. They were
-very angry when we made them go away without them.”
-
-After some further conversation, it was agreed that, although it was
-very desirable to rid themselves of the companionship of the Maggie
-and her occupants, it would be wise to keep the guns taken from the
-boat-thieves until they reached Titusville.
-
-They had, perhaps, no legal right to do this; but they felt that, on
-general principles of justice, they had a right to protect their lives,
-and that this was the way to do it.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVII.
-
-THE CHANNEL-BASS.
-
-
-The stop at Cooper’s store was not a long one. After buying some
-articles of food that they needed, not forgetting a good supply of
-condensed milk for the little bears, they set sail again.
-
-As this was a post-office, the boys had inquired for letters. They had
-no reason to expect any, and they got none; but each of them bought a
-postal-card and mailed a brief message to his family.
-
-There was a good camping-ground, with spring water, six or seven miles
-above, and this they reached about nightfall.
-
-The next day they started off early, and as they sailed along with
-a good wind, they passed a large and comfortable-looking house on
-the west bank, and saw, now and then, dwellings and clearings, which
-proved that they would find the country better settled as they sailed
-northward.
-
-They also met a very neatly-appointed yacht, with a good-sized cabin,
-and among the persons on board were some ladies and children.
-
-“I didn’t suppose we’d meet any ladies down in this part of the world,”
-said Phil.
-
-“Oh, yes,” said Adam. “When I was in these parts before, ladies who
-were travelling in the State, and had pluck enough to get to this
-river, used to come down this fur, but they never went much further
-South. From here up to Titusville you can gin’rally find houses,
-about a day’s sail apart, where people can stay all night. But some
-of the boats you can hire up to Titusville are good big ones, with
-comfortable cabins, and little stoves to cook meals on board, and
-everything convenient. But I wouldn’t want to navigate one of ’em heavy
-boats,’cept where the river was deep and wide; and ladies and children
-haven’t no call, anyway, to go much below this. The country’s too wild
-for ’em.”
-
-About noon, Adam said,--
-
-“If we had time to fish, we might have good sport just now. This part
-of the river is a first-rate place to catch channel-bass.”
-
-“Let’s stop, anyway,” cried Chap. “We might fish an hour without
-hurting anybody. What difference will it make if we get to Boontown
-an hour earlier or later? And it may be that we’ll never get another
-chance to fish for channel-bass; that is, if this river is the only
-place where they can be caught.”
-
-Phil was entirely of Chap’s opinion, and Adam had no objections to
-fish for a time, if the boys cared for the sport. But Phœnix was not
-altogether satisfied with the proposed stoppage.
-
-“If we’re trying to get home as fast as we can,” he said, “I think we
-oughtn’t to stop if we can help it, especially as we’ve lost so much
-time anyway.”
-
-“But this won’t be much time lost,” said Phil, “and as I am
-quartermaster of this party, I think it is my duty to provide you with
-some fresh food, and we’ve nothing on hand but salt ham and some of
-those potted things we got at Cooper’s store.”
-
-“That sounds as if you intended to catch all the fish,” said Chap.
-
-“Of course, if you all want to stop,” said Phœnix, “I’ve nothing more
-to say.”
-
-“Now,” said Chap, standing up and raising his right arm as he spoke,
-“I want to make a remark. It seems to be forgotten that I’m captain of
-this expedition. But I have not forgotten it, and I order a halt for an
-hour’s fishing.”
-
-“After we’ve all agreed to it,” said Phil.
-
-“And as to you, Mr. Treasurer,” continued Chap, addressing Phœnix, and
-paying no attention to Phil’s remark, “I wish to say that if you don’t
-stop criticising and opposing your noble commander, I shall depose you
-from your position.”
-
-“All right,” said Phœnix, with a grin. “If any other fellow has got
-capital enough to run the office, I’m willing.”
-
-“On second thought,” said Chap, “I think we won’t request you to
-resign. As the treasurer of this expedition has to furnish the money,
-you are the most worthy person for the post. Consider your place secure
-as long as your cash holds out. Now, Mr. Steersman, shall we anchor?”
-
-“Just jump forward there, cap’n,” said Adam, “and when I give the word,
-let down the main-sail.”
-
-It took somewhat longer to make the preparations for fishing than the
-boys had supposed it would, for Adam had to run the boat ashore on a
-little island, and wade into the shallow water with a hand-net to catch
-some small fish for bait.
-
-But at last the boat was put out into deep water, the sails were
-lowered, and the anchor down, while the three boys, posting themselves
-in convenient places in the after-part of the boat, threw out their
-lines as far as they could.
-
-There was quite a strong current at this point, and this helped to
-carry the lines out to their full length.
-
-Adam did not fish. In the first place he was willing to hold himself
-ready to direct and assist the boys, and in the second place he had no
-fishing lines.
-
-“What is a channel-bass?” asked Phil. “I don’t think I ever heard of
-them.”
-
-“Well,” said Adam, “it’s a kind of bass that swims in the channel of
-this river, and that’s pretty much all there is about it.”
-
-“Is it a large fish, or a small one?” asked Chap.
-
-Adam was not inclined to give the boys any information on the subject.
-He wanted them to find out for themselves what a channel-bass was.
-
-“Whatever they are,” said Phœnix, after a time, “they seem to be pretty
-scarce; I haven’t had a bite yet.”
-
-“Nor I either,” said both Chap and Phil.
-
-“They ain’t packed in the river like sardines in a box,” said Adam,
-“but I reckon one of ’em will come along after a while.”
-
-“I thought I had a bite,” said Phœnix, after suddenly giving his line
-a little jerk, “but I believe my hook has fouled on something at the
-bottom.” Then, after another pull, he exclaimed, “It’s loose now, but
-there’s nothing on it. Hook, sinker, and all must have gone!”
-
-And he began disconsolately pulling in his slackened line.
-
-Suddenly the cord, which seemed to be merely floating in the water,
-straightened out with a jerk, and a yard or two of it ran through
-Phœnix’s fingers, burning like a hot iron.
-
-Then, as the boy nervously grasped the cord with a tighter hold, he was
-pulled forward with such force that he fell plump upon his knees.
-
-Adam sprang to help Phœnix, but as he did so, the boy rose to his feet.
-
-“Whatever it was,” said Phœnix, “it’s off again. The line is perfectly
-slack.”
-
-“Haul in! haul in!” cried Adam; “you’ve got one. Don’t let your line be
-slack, or he’ll get off.”
-
-Phœnix, now quite excited, rapidly pulled in his line.
-
-When it had become taut again, Adam said,--
-
-“Pull in, but not too hard, or you’ll break your line. If he tries to
-rush off, give him a little line, but if he comes this way, haul in
-your slack as fast as you can, or he’ll get off the hook.”
-
-Phœnix worked away bravely, the other boys looking on with excited
-interest.
-
-He pulled his line in steadily and slowly for a time; then, when the
-fish seemed determined to run away from him, he let out a few yards;
-and when it turned and swam toward the boat, he hauled in the slackened
-line with great rapidity.
-
-In this way he gradually drew his fish nearer and nearer to the boat,
-and at last it became tired, and he was able, with occasional stops
-when the fish gave a short struggle, to pull it slowly in.
-
-Everybody gazed earnestly at the line, and directly they saw, rising
-from the water, close to the boat, a head as big as a dinner-plate.
-There was a jerk, as if the fish decidedly objected to poking its nose
-into the open air, but Adam, who was leaning over the side of the boat,
-ready for the work of the moment, quickly stretched out his arm and
-slipped his hand under the fish’s gill. Then, with a powerful effort,
-he rose to his feet, and drew out of the water a channel-bass, over
-four feet long, and weighing probably forty pounds.
-
-The boys could not find words to express their astonishment and delight
-when they viewed this prize.
-
-“That’s what a channel-bass is!” cried Phil. “If I’d known what
-whoppers they were, I wouldn’t have supposed we could catch one with
-our lines.”
-
-“Your lines are strong,” said Adam, “and your hooks pretty good-sized,
-but if we were comin’ out o’ purpose for channel-bass, we’d have
-heavier tackle. But it would be hard work to haul in a feller like this
-with any line, if you didn’t play him right.”
-
-After being pulled into the boat, the great bass did not struggle as
-long as some of the smaller fish they had caught, and he soon lay quiet
-and dead.
-
-The boys rolled up their lines, for there were no more bites, and it
-was agreed that, having found out what a channel-bass was, they ought
-to be satisfied.
-
-“Is the fish good to eat?” said Phil.
-
-“Tip-top,” answered Adam. “We’ll cover him up and take him along,
-and we can have steaks enough for supper to-night and to-morrow’s
-breakfast, and plenty left for the birds besides.”
-
-“Well,” cried Chap, who had been standing in a reflective mood, “this
-is the way things always happen. Here is Phœnix, who didn’t want to
-stop and fish, and who grumbled and croaked, and didn’t believe there
-were any fish in the river, even after he got to work; and _he_ must
-catch the channel-bass, while Phil and I, who were in for the thing
-from the beginning, and full of honest ardor, didn’t get a bite. Haul
-up the sails and pull in the anchor, and let us away! It’s no use
-struggling against blind luck. Virtue and enthusiasm don’t count.”
-
-This speech was received with a wild laugh, and with four merry hearts
-and a big fish on board, The Rolling Stone set out again upon her
-northward course.
-
-Adam knew exactly where he intended to camp that night, and before
-dark he reached the beach of a little bay upon the eastern shore of the
-river.
-
-After a hearty supper, of which channel-bass was the principal dish,
-and a talk by the camp-fire while Adam smoked his evening pipe, our
-party made everything secure for the night, and were soon asleep in
-their little cabin.
-
-Chap, as we have said before, was a very early riser, and the next
-morning he awoke and slipped quietly out of his narrow quarters without
-awakening any of his companions.
-
-As he gazed around with great delight upon the beautiful morning scene,
-he saw, scarcely a hundred feet from the spot where they were moored, a
-dirty little boat anchored near the shore.
-
-“Upon--my--word,” said Chap to himself, “if that Maggie hasn’t put in
-here in the night!”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVIII.
-
-CHAP BOARDS THE MAGGIE.
-
-
-When Chap Webster stood alone on the deck of The Rolling Stone in the
-bright, cool air of the early morning and gazed at the dirty little
-sail-boat, which lay near the shore a short distance above, his
-feelings were of a very confused nature.
-
-At first he was simply astonished to see the Maggie lying so near them.
-He had supposed that the fellows who had stolen the boat would be
-afraid to come near the people they had injured. But, after all, it was
-no use to be surprised at the impudence of such men. For some reason
-or other they had stolen in here, either at night or very early in the
-morning.
-
-The bow of the Maggie was toward Chap, and the little cabin prevented
-him from seeing anybody who might be in the stern; but very soon it
-was evident that there were persons on board of her, and that they were
-awake.
-
-There was a slight noise of people moving about, and directly the heads
-of the two men were seen above the cabin. Chap instinctively dodged
-behind the cabin of his own boat, but he kept his eyes fixed on the two
-fellows, one of whom presently put a water-keg upon his shoulders, and
-then, with rolled-up trousers and bare feet, both of them waded ashore.
-
-They had anchored their boat in about a foot of water, thinking that if
-they ran her on the sand, they might not be able to get off in a hurry
-if occasion required them to do so.
-
-It was now plain enough why they had come in here. They were out of
-fresh water, and this was the only place for miles where any could be
-obtained.
-
-As he looked upon the two men who had treated him so badly and who
-had been the cause of so much trouble and imminent danger to the
-whole party, Chap began to feel angry. He had believed and steadily
-asserted that the rascals had been let off entirely too easily, and now
-his whole soul became filled with a desire to punish them for their
-misdeeds. If he could meet them, one at a time, he would undertake
-to give them in turn a good thrashing; but the cowards always kept
-together, and he did not care to wake up his companions to assist in
-the desired acts of retributive justice.
-
-For some reason or other Adam and the boys never seemed to enter into
-his plans in that whole-souled way which he would have liked. They
-dampened his enthusiasm, and, as he frequently thought, he never felt
-so much like a captain as when he was captain of himself.
-
-When the two young men with the keg disappeared among the bushes in
-the path which led to the spring--for this was one of the regular
-camping-places on the river--one of those bright ideas to which Chap
-was subject popped into his mind.
-
-Gently taking down a double-barrelled gun, loaded with buckshot, from
-the hooks in the cabin on which it hung, and moving very cautiously so
-as not to awaken his companions, he stepped out on the sand.
-
-He wore nothing but shirt and trousers, and, rolling up the latter, he
-ran along the beach to the Maggie, waded out to her, and got on board.
-Then, with his gun still in his hand, he slipped into the little cabin,
-where he crouched on his hands and knees.
-
-There was a curtain at the open end of the cabin, and Chap drew this in
-front of him, so as to better conceal himself, leaving open a little
-crack through which he might peep.
-
-He had conceived the plan of remaining here until the two young men
-had reappeared, and were about to come on board. Then he would suddenly
-bounce out, and with loaded and cocked gun in hand, he would stop them
-just where they stood, and then he would give them a piece of his mind,
-and they should not move backward nor forward until he had said all he
-had to say.
-
-They had taken possession of his boat, and he would take possession of
-theirs, and they should not have it again until he chose to give it to
-them.
-
-Not another step should they take in their sneaking and nefarious
-career while it was his pleasure that they should stand and listen to
-him. This would be some satisfaction for the wrong he had sustained at
-their hands.
-
-It seemed to the waiting Chap that the young men stayed away a very
-long time, but at last they reappeared, bearing the keg between them.
-But they did not act exactly as Chap desired.
-
-One of them took the keg on his shoulder, while the other walked toward
-the bow of the boat. They thus became separated, and Chap could not yet
-carry out his plans. He must have them together so that he could cover
-them both with his gun. He could not deliver a lecture to one while the
-other was creeping up behind him. So he did not immediately rush out.
-
-In the mean time, the man with the keg put his burden on board, and
-stepped in himself. The other one got on the bow, and pulled the boat
-out toward the anchor, which was in deeper water. In doing this he
-turned the Maggie around, so that the stern was toward The Rolling
-Stone, the occupants of which were still sound asleep.
-
-The man at the bow having pulled the anchor on board, stepped aft, and
-the two stood together for a moment on the stern, looking at the other
-boat. As they did so, Chap heard them make some derogatory remarks
-about the fellows who had taken their guns, and then one of them, with
-a low, disagreeable laugh, said he wondered what had become of the
-long-legged fellow they had chucked overboard.
-
-This remark made Chap grind his teeth with anger. He would show them
-what had become of the long-legged fellow!
-
-A desire for immediate vengeance possessed his whole being, and a
-plan of action flashed into his mind. Laying down his gun, and softly
-pushing aside the curtain, he made one wild bound directly at the
-two men, striking each of them in the middle of the back with his
-outstretched hands.
-
-So sudden and tremendous was the unexpected push, that each of the
-fellows bent forward, tripped over the gunwale, and went head-foremost
-into the river, the boat being now in about four feet of water.
-
-[Illustration: “Crouch down there, you varlets!”]
-
-Chap sprang instantly for his gun, and by the time the two dripping and
-astounded faces arose from the water, he was standing on the stern with
-his double-barrelled weapon cocked and pointed at them.
-
-“Aha!” he cried; “now you know where that long-legged fellow is! And
-now perhaps you know how it feels to be chucked into the water. Crouch
-down there, you varlets!” he shouted, as one of them began to move
-toward the shore. “If you stir from where you are, or lift your chins
-out of water, I’ll fire into you.”
-
-The two fellows, pale, frightened, and trembling, crouched down, with
-their mouths just above the surface of the water, while the fiery Chap
-told them what he thought of them.
-
-“You’re a pretty couple of sneaks to come along, two to one, and pitch
-into a fellow who treated you as if you were decent human beings, and
-then steal everything he has, and leave him alone to starve or,”--he
-was going to add, “or freeze to death,” but remembering that this would
-not be possible in that climate, he said,--“or perish in any way he
-thought best. You didn’t care what became of him. I’m not going to tell
-you the trouble you caused the rest of the party, but if ever two wild
-beasts deserve to be shot, you do.”
-
-Chap’s face now glowed with such righteous indignation that one of the
-young men piteously begged him not to point that cocked gun at them,
-for it might go off.
-
-“Go off!” cried Chap, without moving the weapon. “It would serve you
-right if it did go off, and put an end to your lives of crime. Such
-creatures as you are not needed in this world any more than snakes or
-alligators.”
-
-This last word seemed to instinctively affect one of the men, who,
-turning his eyes riverward, saw, or thought he saw, something dark
-moving along in the deep water beyond. Seized by a new fear, he raised
-himself and made a step toward shore.
-
-Without a second’s hesitation Chap pointed his gun a few feet above the
-fellow’s head and fired; and at the instant of the report both heads
-disappeared beneath the surface of the water.
-
-The sound of Chap’s voice, when he was haranguing the two men in the
-water, aroused the occupants of the other boat, and Phil, Phœnix, and
-Adam were soon popping up their heads to see what Chap was about.
-
-“Hello!” cried Phœnix, “he is on a boat over there talking like
-wildfire.”
-
-“I believe he is preaching to a pair of turtles!” cried Phil.
-
-“Look here,” said Adam, with alarm in his countenance, “there’s
-something up. Slip on some clothes, and let’s get over there. That’s
-the Maggie, and he’s got them two fellers in the water.”
-
-“What on earth does it mean?” asked Phil.
-
-“Haven’t the least idea,” said Adam, “but we must----”
-
-At this moment the report of Chap’s gun rung through the air, and Adam
-and the two boys, barefooted and partially dressed, did not wait for
-another instant, but sprang from the boat and ran for the scene of
-commotion.
-
-The wind had gradually blown the Maggie landward, and she was now
-grounded in very shallow water.
-
-Chap still stood upon the stern, with his gun pointed to the two men,
-who, having held their heads under water until their faces were nearly
-black with suffocation, had now raised themselves, and were begging
-piteously that Chap would put down that gun and let them out. But the
-relentless Chap was just beginning a fresh series of denunciations,
-when Adam sprang on board of the Maggie, and, seizing his arm, threw up
-the muzzle of the gun.
-
-“What on earth are you about?” cried the astonished sailor. “Are you
-goin’ to kill ’em?”
-
-“No,” said Chap, coolly; “I haven’t any idea of killing them. I only
-wanted to soak some of the wickedness out of them.”
-
-“Well, I reckon they’re soaked about enough,” said Adam.
-
-“All right!” said Chap, with a grand air. “You have my permission
-to come out now, and I have nothing more to say to you. I think you
-understand by this time what sort of an opinion I have of you.”
-
-And, so saying, he shouldered his gun, and went ashore, where, joining
-the two boys, he gave them an account of the adventure, which they
-received with shouts of laughter.
-
-“Now, then,” said Adam to the two dripping men, who had climbed on the
-deck of the Maggie, “you had better put on some dry clothes, and get
-out of this as quick as you can. I don’t want to see you shot; but
-you’ve done enough to that young man to warrant him in gettin’ any kind
-o’ satisfaction out o’ you, short o’ killin’, and I don’t know what
-he may take it into his head to do next. I s’pose you put in here for
-water.”
-
-The young men were dragging some old trousers and shirts from under
-their bunks, and while one of them surlily remarked that they had got
-their water, and did not want to stay there any longer, the other made
-an earnest appeal to have their guns restored to them.
-
-“Not much!” said Adam. “I wouldn’t trust you with ’em afore, and I
-guess you’re in a worse temper now than you were when I took ’em.
-We’ll leave the guns at the hotel in Titusville, and you can go there
-and git ’em; and that’s all I have to say about it.”
-
-And, with this remark, Adam left the Maggie, which in ten minutes more
-had pushed off and was sailing away.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIX.
-
-WAITING FOR A VISITOR.
-
-
-During the rest of that day The Rolling Stone had a fair wind, and made
-a good trip. An hour after starting she passed the Maggie, which kept
-well away on the other side of the river. Evening was coming on, when
-Adam ran his boat in at a point he had been very anxious to make. This
-was at a solitary little house, at the edge of the woods, inhabited by
-a man whom he knew. During his former life on the Indian River, Adam
-had made the acquaintance of nearly all the settlers along the shores,
-and he was delighted to find that his old friend, Tom Pitman, still
-lived at this place.
-
-Pitman was a tall, wiry man, full of action, and very talkative. He had
-a small house near the shore, where he lived, with his wife and two
-half-grown daughters, and, back in the woods, he had cleared a field,
-which he had planted with pine-apples.
-
-Everything about the place seemed neat and in good order. The field
-and a small yard in front of the house were well fenced, and there was
-a little pier running out into the water, near which a small boat was
-moored, while a sail-boat was in course of repair on the beach near by.
-
-Pitman came out of his house as The Rolling Stone sailed up, and gave
-Adam and his companions a hearty welcome; but, in spite of his cheerful
-manner, Adam noticed that there seemed to be something on his mind. He
-was continually looking about him, and seemed to be in a great hurry to
-get the party disposed of for the night.
-
-“I suppose we can tie up to your pier, Tom?” said Adam.
-
-“I don’t know about that,” replied Pitman; “not if any of you is goin’
-to sleep on board. I’d have you all come up and sleep in the house, but
-I haven’t got room enough for four of you. I’ve got a bed, though, that
-two of you can have. But them that sleeps on the boat had better anchor
-out a good ways from the shore, after we’ve all had our supper, and
-it’s dark. You needn’t do no cookin’ for yourselves. You’ve all got to
-come in-doors, and eat with us.”
-
-“I suppose we can tie up here till supper is over, can’t we?” asked
-Adam.
-
-“Well, no,” said Pitman, a little nervously. “You’d better run her up
-on the beach there by my boat, and bring your anchor ashore. It may be
-dark afore we’ve done supper.”
-
-“What’s up?” asked Adam. “Anything partic’lar?”
-
-“Well, yes,” said Pitman, lowering his voice. “Is these young friends
-o’ yourn scary?”
-
-“Can’t say that they are,” said Adam. “You can tell ’em anything you
-can tell me.”
-
-“Well, then,” said Pitman, “I’ll tell just how ’tis. I didn’t want to
-frighten these young men, for I s’posed, from their looks, that they’d
-come down from the North, and weren’t used to the kind o’ things that
-turn up in these wild parts. But if you say go ahead, all right. Last
-night a big painter came out o’ the woods, and went out on that pier.
-My dog seed him out there, and made for him. I didn’t know anything
-about it till I heard the noise o’ the fight, and then I came out with
-my gun; but afore I could git here the painter had killed the dog, and
-had dragged him a good way up the shore. I got sight o’ him, and blazed
-away. I reckon I didn’t hit him, but he just left the dog, and put into
-the woods. Painters is cowards when there’s a man about, but they ain’t
-afeard o’ no dog. Now, it’s my ’pinion that that beast’ll be back on
-that pier to-night, hopin’ he’ll git hold of another dog, and I’m goin’
-to watch for him. Now, you can see for yourselves that it wouldn’t be
-exactly pleasant to be sleepin’ in a boat at the foot of that pier with
-a big painter standin’ and lookin’ down at you, and makin’ up his mind
-whether he should go aboard or not.”
-
-“No, indeed!” said Adam; “not even if you were waitin’ with your rifle
-ready, Tom.”
-
-“I reckon he’d be worse company,” said Pitman, “after I’d hit him than
-before, if I didn’t kill him out and out.”
-
-“If you are going to watch for a panther,” cried Chap, “I’m sure none
-of us will want to go to bed, either in the boat or the house. We’ve
-got guns along, and why can’t we all have the fun of hunting the beast?”
-
-“It don’t do to have too many for that sort of thing,” said Pitman;
-“but if any o’ you want to jine in the sport, I’m willin’. It’ll make
-us more certain of gittin’ him. And now let’s go in and have supper
-as quick as we can. Then we’ll come out and make things ready for the
-varmint.”
-
-It was all very well for Mr. Pitman to talk about having supper soon,
-but his wife and two daughters, who had to prepare the meal for four
-additional persons, and all of them very hungry, found it no easy
-matter to get through with their cooking as rapidly as the head of the
-family desired.
-
-It was no use for Mr. Pitman to say that if they didn’t hurry the
-painter would come for his supper before they were through with their
-own. His wife only answered that she reckoned the painter could wait,
-and went on with her frying and stewing.
-
-At last they all sat down to the usual corn-bread, coffee, and fried
-ham, with the addition of a great dish of stewed oysters.
-
-The boys had eaten some of the oysters, which are found in vast beds in
-parts of the Indian River, but had not found them much to their liking.
-They seemed fresher and more insipid than those to which they had been
-accustomed. But these were cooked so nicely that they ate them with
-great delight, and, altogether, they made the best meal they had had
-since leaving home.
-
-Mr. Pitman was very nervous during the meal, and thought his guests
-would never be done eating. He did not begrudge them their food, but he
-was full of anxiety lest the panther should come and go before they had
-made themselves ready to receive his visit.
-
-When Phœnix and Chap had eaten their last mouthful, and Adam had
-drained the third cup of coffee, Mr. Pitman put back his chair, and the
-party arose. Adam greatly desired to smoke his evening pipe, but to
-this his host decidedly objected.
-
-“There won’t be time,” he said, “and besides, the critter might smell
-the smoke. Better wait till we’re through with this business, and then
-you can smoke all you like.”
-
-Adam good-naturedly assented to this arrangement, and the male members
-of the party went outside, while Mrs. Pitman and daughters were
-cautioned to keep in the house, and shut the doors and lower windows,
-for if the panther should be brought to bay, he might think the house a
-good place of refuge.
-
-Mr. Pitman took upon himself the whole plan of arrangement. He first
-examined the arms of the party. He himself had a rifle.
-
-One of the guns taken from the Maggie was a breech-loading rifle, and
-it was loaded, but there were no extra cartridges to fit it, and only
-one shot could be fired from it. This was given to Adam.
-
-The other gun, belonging to the two young men, was a small shot-gun,
-one barrel of which had been discharged that morning by Chap. Both
-barrels were now loaded with number two shot, but Mr. Pitman declared
-the weapon altogether unserviceable for work of the kind expected.
-
-“It won’t carry far enough,” he said, “and the shot will scatter. A
-painter wouldn’t take into no account--a gun like that.”
-
-The double-barrelled gun, which had been hired from Mr. Brewer, was
-loaded with buckshot, and this, Pitman considered, might be of some
-service, and it was given to Phil, as he was the best shot among the
-boys.
-
-“As for you two other young men,” said Mr. Pitman, “the best thing you
-can do is to get into your boat and anchor her a little way out in the
-river. You can see the sport from there as well as anywhere, if you can
-see it at all; and if there’s too many folks ashore, I’m afraid the
-painter will smell us out, or see somebody; and besides, I wouldn’t
-want to have him ranging ’round here, and two young fellows in the
-bushes with no way to take care of themselves.”
-
-Chap and Phœnix did not like this plan very much, but they preferred
-being in the boat to going into the house and peeping through a crack.
-
-It was lighter on the water than on the land, and Mr. Pitman assured
-them that if they kept themselves pretty much out of sight, and quiet,
-they could look all they liked, for the panther wouldn’t mind a boat,
-for there had been boats around when he came the night before.
-
-So Chap and Phœnix went on board The Rolling Stone, taking the smaller
-shot-gun with them, and, pushing out a couple of hundred feet from
-shore, anchored and lay down to await events.
-
-Adam and Phil were then placed behind some low-growing bushes a little
-distance up the beach; while Mr. Pitman took his position behind the
-roots of a fallen palmetto, not far away.
-
-The panther was expected to come from the woods below the house, and
-from their places of concealment each of the party could get a good
-view of the little pier where the dog had been killed, and which was
-still stained with his blood.
-
-The wind was blowing gently from the south, so that if the panther
-carried out the plan as Mr. Pitman had arranged it, there would be no
-danger of his catching the scent of his concealed enemies.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XX.
-
-THE VISITOR ARRIVES.
-
-
-For a long, long time our friends behind the bushes and the uprooted
-tree, as well as those in the boat, waited and waited for the
-appearance of the panther.
-
-It was now as dark as it would be, but the stars were out, and, with
-eyes accustomed to the gloom, objects could be easily seen upon the
-beach or on the water.
-
-But, so far, nothing moved from the woods toward the little pier.
-
-“I might just as well have had another cup of coffee,” whispered Adam,
-“for there was plenty in the pot, and have smoked my pipe. I knowed
-he’d be a long time comin’.”
-
-“You mustn’t talk so much,” said Mr. Pitman, from his post near by,
-“for painters have mighty sharp ears. And mind, I don’t want any of
-you to fire till he’s out on the pier, for if you crack at him while
-he’s on the beach, you might send a ball into the house. That ’ud make
-it lively for mother and the girls. I put us all here close together,
-so that we shouldn’t fire into one another.”
-
-“Who’s talking now?” thought Phil, but he said nothing.
-
-“Phœnix,” said Chap, after the two had watched and watched and watched,
-“I don’t believe much in this panther business, after all. I move that
-you and I take regular watches like the sailors on a ship. First, one
-of us can take a nap for half an hour, and then he can wake up and let
-the other one have a snooze for the same time. In this way each of us
-can get half a night’s sleep in broken dozes. As for that panther, he’s
-badly behind time; most likely switched off on a siding to let a down
-train, such as a couple of bears, pass him.”
-
-Phœnix agreed to this proposal, and kindly allowed Chap to take the
-first nap.
-
-At the end of what he supposed was a good half-hour, but which was, in
-reality, only twenty minutes, Phœnix tried to wake up his companion;
-but it was of no use. Chap slept as sound as a log, and he could not be
-aroused, unless more noise and confusion were made than would be proper
-on such an occasion. So Phœnix determined to watch a little longer, and
-if nothing turned up, to go to sleep himself.
-
-Just about the time this resolution was made, Mr. Pitman remarked, in a
-very audible whisper, that if he had had a puppy dog, that he did not
-care much about, he would have tied it to the end of the pier, and then
-its yelping would have attracted the panther’s attention, and he would
-have been certain to go out there to get it.
-
-Phil whispered that he thought that would have been a cruel thing to do.
-
-“Oh, no,” replied Mr. Pitman. “There wouldn’t ’a’ been no danger to the
-dog. I’d ’a’ put a ball through the painter afore he’d got to him. Stop
-talking! Look thar!”
-
-There was no occasion to tell anybody to look, for along the beach,
-not very far from the edge of the woods, a dark form, like that of an
-immense cat, was moving, stealthily, but with moderate speed, toward
-the house and the pier.
-
-Phil trembled in every fibre when he saw this creature, not with fear,
-but with excitement.
-
-“Is that a panther?” he thought. “So near a house, and right on the
-very beach where we are ourselves?”
-
-He raised his gun a little in imitation of Adam, who was kneeling
-silently behind his bush; but his arms trembled so much that he thought
-he would never be able to hit anything, no matter how near it might be.
-
-Phœnix also saw the approaching panther, and all idea of sleep
-immediately forsook him. He endeavored to gently arouse Chap, but this
-was useless, and with strained eyes he watched the scene on shore.
-
-The panther, as it came up the beach, passed so near to the house that
-even Mr. Pitman was amazed, and thought that he would not have slept
-so soundly during the many nights he had spent in that house, if he
-had known that a panther would dare to prowl so near its windows. But
-this beast was unusually rash or courageous, and it is seldom indeed
-that a panther will venture so near a human habitation; but among wild
-animals, as well as men, there are individuals who are more daring and
-reckless of consequences than their fellows; and in the wilder parts of
-Florida, panthers of an investigating or enterprising turn of mind have
-been known to totally disregard the proximity of man.
-
-When nearly opposite the little gate of the house-yard, the panther
-stopped, and raised its head as if listening, and then, with a
-noiseless trot, it went directly toward the place where it had killed
-the dog. It walked more slowly along the pier, putting down its head
-occasionally to sniff, and then stopped upon the extreme end of the
-little platform, its small head and long, lithe body standing out
-clearly against the sky.
-
-At this moment the reports of two rifles, sounding almost like one,
-rang out upon the night, while immediately after them the two barrels
-of a heavily-loaded shot-gun were discharged with a heavier and more
-resounding detonation.
-
-Almost at the instant of the rifle-shots, and an instant perhaps before
-Phil fired, the panther sprang into the air, and came down, not upon
-the pier, but into the water beyond. There was a great splash, and then
-he could be plainly seen swimming away from shore.
-
-Phil, Adam, and Pitman sprang out of their concealment, and the latter
-hastily reloaded his rifle.
-
-It was probable that the panther had been struck, for it was scarcely
-to be supposed that the mere noise of the reports would have frightened
-him so much that he would have taken to the water, but he could not
-have been badly hurt, for he was swimming vigorously.
-
-At first it seemed as if the panther was making for the other side
-of the river, but he had not swum out very far before he changed his
-course, and made directly for The Polling Stone.
-
-At the moment he turned, Pitman’s rifle again rang out, and the ball
-was seen to send up a quick jet of water a yard or two beyond the
-swimming animal.
-
-The situation was now an alarming one. Phil was reloading, and Pitman
-already had another charge in his rifle; but it was impossible now to
-fire at the panther without aiming directly at the boat. Adam dropped
-his rifle, and ran toward the small boat by the beach. He would have
-rowed out to do what he could to help the boys, despite the danger to
-himself, but there was no oars in the boat.
-
-“Push off! push off!” shouted Pitman to the boys in the boat. “Pull up
-your anchor! Haul up your sail!”
-
-He evidently thought that the only means of safety was to sail away
-from the panther as soon as possible.
-
-But there was no time for all this to be done, even if Phœnix and Chap
-had been expert in the management of anchors and sails, which they were
-not. The panther was evidently making for The Rolling Stone as a place
-of refuge, and from the way he was swimming he would quickly reach it.
-He seemed to totally disregard the presence of two boys on board, or
-the fact had escaped his attention.
-
-The sound of the firing had, of course, awakened Chap, and he and
-Phœnix were hastily discussing what they should do. Phœnix seized a
-hatchet, and posted himself by the side of the boat.
-
-“If he comes near, I’ll brain him,” said he.
-
-Chap snatched up the shot-gun. It had been pronounced harmless to
-panthers, but it might frighten the brute.
-
-The panther was now within four or five feet of the boat, and Phœnix
-stood ready, with his hatchet raised. Chap kneeled down, and leaned
-over the boatside, and as he did so, he involuntarily reached out his
-gun toward the panther. This action seemed to irritate the beast, and
-he was so near that he actually opened his mouth, and took hold of
-the muzzle of the gun. At this instant Chap pulled both triggers, and
-two loads of number two shot, in almost compact masses, entered the
-panther’s brain. When the boys looked at the water, there was nothing
-but a swirl of ripples where the angry head had just been seen.
-
-“You’ve settled him!” cried Phœnix; but still he stood ready with his
-uplifted hatchet.
-
-In a moment the body of the panther reappeared, now nearer the boat,
-one side uppermost, limp and motionless.
-
-“He’s dead!” cried Chap. “Grab him! Don’t let him sink again!”
-
-And, throwing down the gun, he leaned over the side of the boat.
-
-“Look out!” cried Phœnix. “If he isn’t dead, it won’t be much fun to
-grab him.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXI.
-
-THE METROPOLIS OF THE INDIAN RIVER.
-
-
-Phil, Adam, and Mr. Pitman had been standing on the shore, watching
-with breathless anxiety the rapid course of the events recorded in the
-previous chapter. As the panther neared the boat, they were almost wild
-with terror, but they could offer no help, and the two boys seemed to
-be doing all that could be done.
-
-Their eyes were now so accustomed to the obscurity of the night, and
-there was so much reflected starlight from the water, that they could
-plainly see the panther’s head as it swam, and Phœnix’s form was very
-distinct as he stood with uplifted hatchet.
-
-They saw that Chap had the gun, and each in his heart hoped that he
-might fire it and frighten away the beast.
-
-When the gun was fired, and the triumphant cries of the boys were
-heard, Adam shouted across the water,--
-
-“Look out! he’ll be at you again!”
-
-The good sailor had no idea anything had happened, but that the
-panther had been frightened away by the discharge of the gun. The dark
-reflection of the boat made it impossible for him to see what was going
-on in the water close to its side.
-
-Chap, however, was not to be discouraged by Adam’s shout or Phœnix’s
-warning.
-
-“The thing is dead!” he cried, “and I’m not going to lose it. It’ll
-sink again before you know it. There’s its tail close to you. Can’t you
-take hold of it?”
-
-Phœnix hesitated. To take hold of the tail of a wild beast which a
-minute before had been full of angry life, seemed to him a risky piece
-of business. The animal might be merely stunned, and, reviving, might
-object to have its tail pulled. Still, Phœnix was as loath as Chap to
-lose the panther, and as the body seemed about to sink again he reached
-out and seized the floating tail.
-
-Chap was so excited that he would have gladly clutched the panther by
-the back of the neck, but it was just a little out of his reach.
-
-Phœnix pulled the tail toward him, and Chap sprang to assist.
-
-“It’s dead! it’s dead!” yelled Chap, as the two boys pulled steadily
-at the tail, and the motionless body of the panther was drawn close to
-the boat.
-
-When Phil and the two men heard Chap cry that the panther was dead,
-they were as much amazed as relieved. They had not supposed the shot
-they had heard could have killed the beast. They were now anxious
-to get to the spot as quickly as possible, and see what had really
-happened.
-
-Pitman ran into the house, and came back with the oars, and followed by
-his wife and daughters, who, now that they heard the panther was dead,
-were perfectly willing to come out of doors, and stood on the beach
-while Mr. Pitman, Adam, and Phil jumped into the boat, and rapidly
-rowed to The Rolling Stone.
-
-When they reached her side, they found Phœnix and Chap each having hold
-of one of the hind legs of the panther, and pulling it into the boat.
-
-A lantern was lighted, and the beast carefully examined. It was a
-handsome, full-grown panther, as big a one, Mr. Pitman said, as he had
-ever seen.
-
-When the manner of the killing had been fully explained, and it had
-been found that the panther had been struck in the leg by one rifle
-ball, although of course, it could not be determined from whose rifle
-it came. Chap stood up and leaned against the cabin, the light of the
-lantern shining full upon his manly form.
-
-“Gentlemen,” said he, affecting a portly grandeur, while his eyes
-twinkled good-humoredly, “if you want to know how to kill a panther,
-or any other beast, come to me, and I’ll tell you how to do it. It’s
-all nonsense to double yourself up for hours behind a prickly palmetto
-bush, and sit there till your back aches, and wishing you had never
-heard of the thing, and were comfortable in bed. You might just as well
-lie down and take a comfortable sleep, and then when the wild beast
-comes up to you, just wake up and poke your gun into his mouth, and
-blow his brains out. That is the easy and sensible way of doing the
-thing with all the modern improvements.”
-
-“All very fine,” laughed Phil, “if you have somebody to wake you up at
-the proper moment, and drive the panther to the place where you are
-snoozing.”
-
-“Of course, of course!” said Chap, with a grand wave of his hand. “The
-captain must have his retainers; that is understood.”
-
-The panther was put into the small boat, and Adam and Pitman rowed
-ashore.
-
-There the dead beast, after having been viewed with much delight by the
-female Pitmans, was hung up to the limb of a tree and carefully skinned
-by the two men.
-
-When this job was finished Adam was glad to accept his friend’s offer
-of a bed, the three boys being, by this time, fast asleep on their boat.
-
-After breakfast, the next morning, Mr. Pitman asked Chap for his
-address, and informed him that after he had properly prepared the skin
-of the panther, he intended to send it to him.
-
-To this Chap demurred, saying that Mr. Pitman ought to keep the skin
-himself, and if he gave it to anybody, he ought to give it to some one
-of the party who had had so long and weary a watch for it, and not to
-the fellow who had gone to sleep and let the rest look out for the
-approach of the beast.
-
-But Mr. Pitman would listen to nothing of the kind, insisting that the
-one who shot the panther should have the skin, and Phil, Phœnix, and
-Adam agreeing that this was right, the matter was so settled.
-
-As soon as possible our party set sail, with hearty expressions of good
-will toward the Pitman family. The wind was fair, and, after a stop
-that night at a place where nothing memorable occurred, they came early
-the next afternoon in sight of Titusville.
-
-On the way much attention had been paid to the health and comfort of
-the little bears, and now that they were nearing the town, Adam gave
-the tiller to Phil, and began to comb the soft hair and to generally
-tidy up the little cubs. One of these animals had such a wise air that
-Phil named him Solomon, whereupon Chap declared that his little sister
-should be called the Queen of Sheba, giving a very broad sound to the
-final “a,” in imitation of the backwoods accent.
-
-“If there’s anybody in the town,” said Adam, “that wants ’em bad enough
-to pay well for ’em, I’ll let ’em have ’em; but if no such person turns
-up, I’ll lug the little creturs North as long as I’ve money enough to
-buy milk.”
-
-“Is this what that girl in the woods considered a big place?” exclaimed
-Chap, as they sailed up to the town. “What would she say if she saw
-the mighty metropolis of Boontown, not to mention New York, London, or
-Pekin?”
-
-Titusville was a settlement of about thirty or forty low wooden houses,
-none of them far from the river-front, and all seeming to cluster
-around and to depend upon an extensive one-story building, forming
-three sides of a square, and fronted by large and well-kept grounds,
-which stretched for two or three hundred feet to the river, where there
-was a pretty little wharf. This house was the hotel, and the only
-building of any size or pretension in the place.
-
-As they came up to the wharf, they saw sitting on the extreme end
-of the platform a small man, with sandy hair, short trousers, no
-stockings, and cowhide shoes.
-
-“I’ll bet the left ear of little Solomon,” said Adam, “that that’s the
-brother of John Brewer. There’s a kind o’ family likeness about him.”
-
-The little man helped them to make the boat fast, and as he did so a
-smile of recognition seemed to flicker over his face.
-
-“Are you John Brewer’s brother?” said Adam, when he landed.
-
-“Yes,” said the other. “And that’s his boat, ain’t it?”
-
-Adam replied that it was, and explained the arrangement that had been
-made.
-
-“I’ve been a-waitin’ here for the mail-boat,” said the other, bringing
-out his words very slowly, “but now that this one’s here, I reckon I
-may as well take her.”
-
-“Don’t you think you’d a great sight better take her?” said Adam. “I
-consider this a tip-top chance for you to get back comfortable and save
-money.”
-
-“I reckon that’s so,” said the other. “Goin’ up to the hotel?”
-
-“Yes,” said Adam, “and if you’ll come along, we’ll give you the money
-that we owe your brother,--that is, if the treasurer says so.”
-
-“All right,” said Phœnix.
-
-And after making the boat secure, the valises and other traps were
-taken out, and the whole party walked up the broad, gravel path which
-led to the hotel.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXII.
-
-THE COLONEL.
-
-
-As the party approached the hotel, they saw on the wide porch which ran
-along the front of the main building a man in a wheeled chair.
-
-“That’s the colonel,” said Adam. “He owns the hotel and pretty much the
-whole town besides.”
-
-“He’s in an invalid’s chair,” remarked Phil; “but he don’t look very
-sick.”
-
-“Sick!” laughed Adam. “Not much! But he’s been in that chair a long
-time.”
-
-They now reached the porch and ascended the steps.
-
-The colonel, who had been steadfastly watching them as they came up the
-path, was a heavy, vigorous-looking man, broad-chested, and sun-burned,
-with a clear, piercing eye and a powerful voice. One of his feet was
-affected by chronic rheumatism, and thus being unable to walk, he
-spent all his waking time in his wheeled chair, in which he moved about
-the premises, sometimes turning the wheels himself, and sometimes being
-pushed by a servant.
-
-At meal times he was wheeled to the head of the table; when business
-was to be attended to, he was rolled to the clerk’s desk, and wherever
-he was needed, there he and his chair were sure to be found.
-
-He had been a pioneer and a soldier in his time, and had been noted for
-his great energy and high spirit.
-
-These qualities, which had once made him conspicuous in border warfare,
-and had carried him through many dangers, both by land and sea, had
-now made him the master spirit of this little settlement on the Indian
-River. He had projected the settlement; owned the greater part of
-it; held its principal offices, and exercised a general power, which
-resembled that of an ancient baron over his feudal subjects.
-
-“Well, Adam Guy,” said the colonel, extending his hand to the sailor,
-“where did you come from? and who have you brought with you? I don’t
-mean Sam Brewer. I know all I want to know about him.”
-
-Adam then introduced the three boys, and proposed that Phil, whom he
-seemed to consider the best talker of the party, should tell how it
-happened that they were there.
-
-Wooden chairs, which were abundant on the porch, were now drawn up, and
-Phil told the story of the adventures of himself and his companions
-from the time of the wreck of the tug-boat up to the present moment,
-leaving out, of course, many incidents, which, although interesting,
-were not necessary to be told.
-
-The colonel listened, fixing his keen eyes on Phil all the time that he
-was telling his story.
-
-“Well,” said he, “you’ve had a pretty rough time of it, but you’ve got
-to a safe port at last. I suppose you want to go on North as soon as
-you can, hey?”
-
-“Oh, yes,” said Phil; “our friends must be very anxious about us, and
-we want to get to them as soon as possible.”
-
-“No doubt of it,” said the colonel. “I’ve heard about you, and I’ve
-been looking out for you for three or four days. You’ve been a precious
-long time getting up the river. Doctor Walker told me about you--saw
-you down at Brewer’s--and he had a message for your folks which he was
-going to telegraph when he got to Sanford.”
-
-“I suppose he has sent the telegram by this time,” said Phil.
-
-“Oh, yes,” replied the colonel. “He got here the middle of the week,
-caught the boat, and went right on. But you fellows will have to stay
-here till Wednesday. There won’t be no boat till then.”
-
-The boys looked at each other in consternation. This was Saturday, and
-a delay of three days in this place seemed a grievous thing to them.
-
-“You needn’t look so long-faced about it!” exclaimed the colonel. “You
-can’t go on, and you might as well be satisfied. Here’s a good hotel,
-where you can be comfortable and live well at a reasonable price. You
-got safe to my place, and you’re all right. When the time comes I’ll
-start you off and fix everything straight for you. You needn’t give
-yourselves any more trouble about anything. You couldn’t be in a better
-place than this. Here’s the finest air, the best accommodations, and
-the prettiest stretch of water in all Florida. All you’ve got to do
-is to enjoy yourselves. If you want to know anything, just come to
-me.--Bob!”
-
-At this last word, which was shouted in a stentorian voice, a
-well-dressed negro boy came running to the colonel.
-
-“Bob,” said he, “take this party to Number six and Number seven,--two
-in one room and two in the other.--Now, you’d better go and fix
-yourselves up. Supper will be ready in half an hour.”
-
-When the boys had washed and dressed themselves and put on the
-white shirts they had brought in their valises, they looked quite
-neat and presentable, while Adam, who shared Phœnix’s room,--for
-this establishment was conducted on democratic principles,--came in
-afterward, and put himself into the best order possible, combing and
-curling his hair as carefully as if he had been an old-time dandy.
-
-When the boys went into the large central room of the hotel, they found
-the colonel at his desk, for he was his own clerk, and they entered
-their names on the register.
-
-“What are your charges, colonel?” asked Phœnix, who was the last one at
-the desk.
-
-“Our regular charge is two dollars and a half a day,” said the colonel,
-“but I’ll take you four for nine dollars a day.”
-
-Phœnix made no answer, but for a moment his face seemed almost as long
-as Chap’s legs. Supper was now ready, and during the first part of the
-meal Phœnix said but little, and seemed to have no appetite; but the
-example of his companions soon had an effect upon him, and he began to
-eat as heartily as anybody.
-
-“This is a tip-top place,” said Chap, as the three boys walked down
-the gravelled path after supper. “I don’t know when I’ve eaten such a
-gorgeous meal.”
-
-“The meal is gorgeous enough,” said Phœnix, in a doleful tone, “but
-that isn’t all of it. The price is a great sight more gorgeous. What do
-you say to nine dollars a day for the four of us?”
-
-“Nine dollars!” exclaimed Chap. “We can’t do anything like that. We
-haven’t got money enough, have we? After we’ve paid for the boat, we
-won’t begin to have enough.”
-
-“We must go to some cheaper place,” said Phil. “Of course we can’t pay
-such rates as that.”
-
-Adam and Brewer now joined the party, and as the identity of the latter
-had been established, he was paid the eight dollars that was due for
-the hire of the boat and the gun. He said he did not intend to start
-down the river that night, but further than this he seemed to have no
-plans, and strolled down toward the river.
-
-“Adam,” said Phil, “we must get out of this place. It is too
-expensive for us. Where shall we find the cheapest kind of a hotel or
-boarding-house?”
-
-Adam laughed.
-
-“You can’t find it in this town,” he said. “If you want to stop in
-Titusville, you’ve got to stop in this house. There isn’t any other
-place to go to. Catch any of the people of this town takin’ boarders
-away from the colonel! They know better what’s good for ’em.”
-
-“But what are we to do?” asked Phœnix. “We haven’t got the money to
-stay here.”
-
-“Well,” said Adam, “I’ve very little money with me, but if I had it I’d
-lend it to you. But you needn’t bother yourselves about me. I can work
-my way North somehow.”
-
-“No, that won’t do,” said Phil. “You know we told you that if you’d
-sail our boat, and show us the way, and do all those things that we
-don’t know anything about, we’d pay your way North, and we’ll do it,
-too, as soon as we get money from our friends. But the thing is, what
-are we to do now? We’ve used more than we expected to, and we didn’t
-suppose there would be hotel bills here. We thought we’d go right on.”
-
-“Well, now I’ll tell you,” said Adam, “what you’d better do. Just go,
-all three of you, to the colonel, and tell him the fix you’re in. It’s
-his business to set things right in this town, and he’ll let you know
-what you have to do. If anything is to be set up or knocked down, he
-wants to do it himself.”
-
-“I’m not particularly anxious to have him knock me down,” said Chap.
-
-“It’ll go easier to be knocked down now” said Adam, “than after you’ve
-run up a great big bill, and I recommend you to go straight to him, and
-let him know how things stand.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIII.
-
-A NEW EXPEDITION PLANNED.
-
-
-The boys went up to the hotel, where they found the colonel sitting
-behind his desk.
-
-Phil was generally expected to do the talking for the party whenever
-anything important was to be said, and he, therefore, with very little
-preface or hesitation, informed the big man in the chair of the
-condition in which he and his friends now found themselves in regard to
-finances.
-
-The colonel listened to what Phil told him, and then, after looking at
-them all with a steady glance, he said:
-
-“Got no money, hey?”
-
-The boys wished he would not speak so loud and clear, for there were
-several persons in the room, and Phœnix answered,--
-
-“We’ve got some, but not enough.”
-
-“How much have you got?” asked the colonel.
-
-The treasurer then explained that, owing to their having been very long
-on the way, and also having to pay more for boat-hire, food, etc., than
-they had expected, and to hire Indians, they had only about seventeen
-dollars left. They had hoped to have enough to take them to Enterprise
-or Sanford, where Adam thought that some of the steamboat captains
-would take them on board, and let them pay for their passage when they
-got to Jacksonville.
-
-“I don’t believe they’d do it,” said the colonel. “They’re too sharp
-for that sort of thing. You haven’t enough to pay your way from here
-anywhere, or to stay here. Are you sure of money when you get to
-Jacksonville?”
-
-“Oh, yes,” said Phil, promptly. “If that telegram was sent on I expect
-there are funds waiting there for us now, and if there isn’t, or if
-there shouldn’t be enough, we’ll telegraph, and they’ll send us all we
-need.”
-
-The colonel rubbed his head.
-
-“Well,” said he, “you can stay here till Wednesday, all four of you,
-for I suppose you still count Adam Guy in your party, and I’ll make out
-your bill at my regular rates, and I’ll make it out to you,” pointing
-to Phil; “and when you get home--you needn’t do it before--you can send
-me the amount.”
-
-The boys all looked relieved, and each one thanked the colonel
-heartily.
-
-“That’s all right,” said he. “You’re not the handsomest fellows I ever
-see, but you look honest.”
-
-A slight shade of anxiety now returned to Phœnix’s face.
-
-“How much will it cost, sir,” he said, “to go from here to Enterprise?”
-
-“I charge you a dollar apiece,” said the colonel, “to carry you
-over to Salt Lake. That’s seven miles away, and it’s where you take
-the steamboat. Then the fare is six dollars apiece to Enterprise or
-Sanford.”
-
-“Squelched again!” said Chap.
-
-The colonel looked at him with a half smile.
-
-“A fellow with legs like yours,” he said, “ought to be able to walk it.
-The soft spots you’d have to pass over ain’t more’n a yard deep.”
-
-“Oh, _I_ could walk it easy enough,” said Chap; “but I couldn’t carry
-three short-legged fellows. That’s where the trouble comes in.”
-
-“Well, then, I guess I won’t make you do it,” said the colonel. “Let
-me see,” taking a pencil and a piece of paper; “four ones is four, and
-four sixes is twenty-four, and then four more sixes, from Sanford to
-Jacksonville, is twenty-four more, and then a couple of dollars for
-extras--none of you fellows drink, do you?”
-
-“Not one of us,” promptly replied Chap.
-
-“I thought as much,” said the colonel, “and that comes to fifty-four
-dollars. Take seventeen from that, and it leaves thirty-seven. That’s
-the amount you are short, and, to make it even, we’ll call it forty.
-Now, if one of you fellows will make out a note to me for forty
-dollars, payable in thirty days, and the other two will indorse it,
-I’ll let you have the money.”
-
-This unexpected offer almost stupefied the boys, and they could
-scarcely find words with which to express their gratitude.
-
-“Oh, it’ll be all right enough,” said the colonel. “I know that all of
-you or one of you will pay me the money, or I’ll make it hot for you,
-no matter what part of the country you’re in. When a man owes me money,
-he pays it.”
-
-“But none of us are of age,” suggested Phil. “Perhaps our
-signatures----”
-
-“Don’t talk to me of age,” roared the colonel. “If I lend you the
-money, you’ll pay it back to me. There’ll be no getting out of that.
-I won’t charge you any interest. It’ll be cheaper for me to let that
-money go for awhile without bringing in anything than to keep you
-fellows here eating at the rate of four dollars a day a head.”
-
-When Adam was told of the arrangement which had been made between the
-colonel and the boys, he smiled.
-
-“You might travel a long ways,” he said, “before you’d come across
-such another man as the colonel. If you treat him square and he likes
-you, he’s ready at any time to give you a friendly h’ist; but if you
-get him down on you, you’ll wish you’d never been born. Nobody need
-think that because the colonel is sittin’ in that chair all day and
-can’t never walk a step out of it that he needn’t be afraid of him.
-When I was down here afore, he used to have something to do with the
-revenue service, and if he’d hear of any smugglers tryin’ to get into
-the country across this river with cigars or anything else, he’d have
-his chair rolled in no time aboard the boat he used to sail in, and
-he put after them fellers, and I can tell you what it is, there’s no
-man that ever put in along this coast with smuggled goods would want
-to see the colonel comin’ after him, with his rifle in his hands, and
-that black eye of his a-flashin’ out about a mile ahead. He always was
-an ugly customer to run afoul of, and he’s jist as bad now as ever,
-if things go crooked. I ain’t surprised a bit at what he did for you
-fellers. It’s jist like him.”
-
-The next day was Sunday, and the boys looked so bright and fresh, with
-their well-blackened boots and their clean white shirts and collars,
-that they felt quite fit to mingle in general society.
-
-They would have gone to church, but were prevented from so doing by the
-fact that the town did not yet contain a church.
-
-On Monday morning, after breakfast, the three boys were sitting in a
-small summer-house, which was built at the end of the pier belonging to
-the hotel.
-
-A little way out in the river, The Rolling Stone was moored, and there
-were other boats anchored here and there in the river.
-
-A party of sportsmen who had been at the hotel had already started on a
-trip down the river, and the white sails of their little yacht could be
-seen several miles away over the blue and sparkling water.
-
-The river here was very broad, it being six miles across to the wide,
-low island which separated it from the sea, but for a long way out
-from the shore it was very shallow, and a party of boys with rolled-up
-trousers, waded out with their cast-nets to a distance which very much
-astonished our friends upon the pier.
-
-“Well, I tell you what it is!” cried Chap; “we’ve got to do something,
-or go somewhere. We won’t leave this town till Wednesday, and that
-gives us two clear days, and we don’t want to waste them. Now, the
-point is, what is there to do that we can get the most fun out of?”
-
-“I suppose Adam might put us up to something,” said Phœnix, “but he’s
-gone to work to help a man down there who is building a boat. He said
-he might as well make some money while he is here as not.”
-
-“Well, then we’ll go ask some one else,” said Chap. “We’re bound to do
-something.”
-
-At this moment a slow step was heard on the pier, and Mr. Brewer’s
-brother directly joined the group.
-
-“Hello!” cried Chap. “I thought you would have been off for home long
-ago.”
-
-“No,” said the other, languidly, taking a seat; “I ain’t in no hurry. I
-reckon I’ll start after awhile, some time. You fellers have got to wait
-here for the Winkyminky.”
-
-“What’s that?” asked Phil.
-
-“That’s the boat you’re goin’ in on Wednesday,” said Brewer’s brother.
-“She’s a good little boat--Cap’n Root’s boat.”
-
-“I suppose that’s the one,” said Chap; “and we were just talking about
-what we should do while we were waiting for her. Can’t you give us an
-idea? Would it pay to get a boat, and go out after ducks?”
-
-“No,” said the other; “that ain’t much fun, and they ain’t good eatin’.
-If I was you fellers, I’d go up to Lowper’s Creek, and shoot ’gators.”
-
-“Shoot alligators!” cried Chap. “That’s splendid! Where is that creek?”
-
-“It’s about ten or twelve miles above here,” said Brewer’s brother,
-“and it’s jist chock full o’ ’gators. You never see so many in all your
-born days. You kin hire a rifle at the hotel, and you kin git all the
-teeth and hides you want.”
-
-The boys considered this a glorious idea.
-
-“But how will we get there?” asked Phil. “We might hire a boat, but
-Adam is busy, and couldn’t sail us.”
-
-“I’ll take you up in that boat,” said Brewer, “and I kin sail you
-jist as well as Adam Guy. I won’t charge you nothin’, and I’ll borrow
-a little dinky, and tow it behind. We have to go up the creek in a
-row-boat when we begin to hunt ’em.”
-
-All this promised great sport for the boys, and no time was lost in
-making the necessary arrangements.
-
-It was planned that they should start as soon as possible, take some
-provisions along, stay up at the creek all night, and come back the
-next day.
-
-When Adam heard of the scheme he at first looked a little doubtful, but
-then he smiled and said he reckoned the thing might work.
-
-“But you’ll have a gay time,” he added, “goin’ after ’gators with Coot
-Brewer.”
-
-“Coot?” asked Chap.
-
-“Yes,” said Adam; “that’s the name he goes by along this river. I
-reckon he got it because he isn’t good for much. But he ought to know
-how to sail a boat, and if you keep a sharp eye on him I guess he won’t
-hender you much. I’d go along, but I can’t back out of this job now.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIV.
-
-COOT BREWER TAKES THE HELM.
-
-
-The boys did not start for Lowper’s Creek and the alligators as soon
-as they expected. They found that a good deal of talk, and a good many
-preparations were necessary before they could get off.
-
-The colonel did not altogether approve of the plan, but when he was
-assured that the boys could all swim, he said he reckoned no harm would
-come to them, and that they might as well be off on a trip of this kind
-as lounging around the hotel.
-
-He called Bob, and gave orders than an abundance of provisions, enough
-to last the party till the following afternoon, should be immediately
-got ready. He also furnished them with a little oil-stove, on which to
-boil their coffee on board the boat.
-
-“You see I’m not going to lose anything by your going up the creek,”
-he said. “I’ll keep your rooms for you, and furnish your meals. It’ll
-cost you just as much, whether you sleep among the ’gators or among
-Christians.”
-
-The boys assured him that they had not the slightest idea of his making
-any reduction on account of the trip.
-
-“I expect you fellows laugh,” he said, “at my keeping you straight up
-to terms when I’m going to let you go away without paying me a red, but
-I do my business on a business basis. I don’t give you anything, and I
-expect to get back all that’s owing to me. Do you understand that?”
-
-The boys understood it perfectly.
-
-In the matter of hiring rifles, there was some little trouble. The
-colonel had but one, and there was no other rifle in the town at that
-time to be had excepting the weapon which, with a small shot-gun, had
-been captured from the men on board of the Maggie, and given to the
-colonel.
-
-The latter had heard the story of the theft of The Rolling Stone, and
-had made no remark whatever on the subject, except that he would take
-charge of the guns, and keep them till they were called for.
-
-Chap proposed that they should take this rifle, and pay the young men
-for the use of it, but this the colonel positively refused to allow.
-The gun had been hired in the town, and he would keep it until the
-persons who had taken it should appear.
-
-So they were obliged to be content with but one rifle, although Brewer
-said that his brother’s shot-gun, loaded with buckshot, would do as
-well for a ’gator as a bear, if they could only get near enough.
-
-“What are you going to do with the ’gators you kill?” asked the
-colonel, when the boys were about to start.
-
-“Oh, Mr. Brewer is going to prepare the skins and teeth of some of
-them, and send them on to us,” said Phil.
-
-“Do you hear that?” roared the colonel, to some men on the other side
-of the room. “Coot Brewer is going to polish the teeth and tan the
-hides of the ’gators these young men kill, and send them on to them at
-the North.”
-
-At this announcement there was a general laugh, during which the boys
-left.
-
-“He thinks we can’t kill alligators,” said Chap; “but, then, all these
-people suppose we’re city boys, just because we come from the North. I
-believe most folks down here have an idea that the whole North is built
-up solid with houses, like one great town, and it’s no use telling them
-we’ve been using guns ever since we were big enough to hold them.”
-
-The Rolling Stone was found at the end of the pier, with Coot Brewer
-in it, and the row-boat which he had borrowed made fast to the stern.
-Adam was also there, having left his work to see them off.
-
-“Be careful you don’t shoot each other,” was his parting injunction,
-“and don’t haul in any ’gator till you’re sure he’s dead.”
-
-The boys agreed to remember these admonitions, and everything having
-been put aboard, The Rolling Stone set sail up the river, with a good
-wind almost directly from the south, which, as they were sailing
-northward, ought to have carried them rapidly along; but for some
-reason or other, the boat did not seem to behave as well as when Adam
-was at the helm.
-
-Coot Brewer put her directly before the wind, and sometimes she would
-sail on at a good rate, and then she would begin to rock, the end of
-her boom almost dipping into the water as she went over on that side.
-
-Phœnix had just remarked that the boat had never been so much like a
-rolling stone as now, when the motion became so violent that Brewer was
-a little frightened, and put her about so suddenly that the boom came
-round with tremendous force, just grazing the top of Chap’s head.
-
-“I should think that sort of thing would upset her,” said Phil, who did
-not look upon Coot Brewer as much of a sailor.
-
-“But it didn’t, you see,” remarked the helmsman, complacently. “She’s a
-pretty stiff little boat.”
-
-After this, they tacked across the river for a while. Then they went
-before the wind again. Then they lay to while Mr. Brewer took in some
-reefs of the main-sail, which he said he would have done before had he
-thought about it.
-
-“It’ll make it easier for your heads,” he said, “if she jibes.”
-
-After a sail which lasted a great deal longer than Mr. Brewer said it
-would, the boat arrived at the mouth of the creek.
-
-“You can’t sail up the creek, you know,” said Brewer. “We go up there
-in the dinky. The way to hunt the ’gators here is to row up the creek
-a good long way, and then haul in oars and float down. That don’t
-frighten ’em, you see, and you kin easy git near enough to shoot ’em.
-But it’s too late to go up this evenin’, and so we’d better anchor the
-boat, git our supper, and go to bed, so’s to be up bright and airly
-to-morrow mornin’. We kin kill all the ’gators we want before noon, and
-then we’ll have plenty of time to git back to town before it’s dark.”
-
-This plan was agreed to, although the boys had hoped to begin their
-sport that afternoon, and the night was spent on the boat at the mouth
-of the creek.
-
-“Do you hear ’em roarin’ over there?” asked Mr. Brewer, after they had
-gone to bed. “I tell you we’ll have splendid times to-morrow!”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXV.
-
-AMONG THE ALLIGATORS.
-
-
-Early the next morning Chap awakened the party. The coffee was soon
-boiled, and after a hasty breakfast the two guns were put into the
-row-boat, together with some drinking water and a small luncheon, which
-Chap thought they might need, and Coot having taken the oars, they
-proceeded up the creek.
-
-They had not gone very far before it became very evident that all that
-Coot Brewer had said about the alligators in that creek was entirely
-correct. The ugly creatures were seen in great numbers, appearing,
-as Chap said, to come from every direction except down from the sky.
-They rose up from the bottom of the creek, their great heads and backs
-appearing above the water.
-
-The boat, which Coot rowed in an extremely gentle manner, did not seem
-to disturb them at all, and they came toward it, or swam away from it,
-as if it was of no consequence, some of them approaching almost within
-an oar’s length. On the bank, huge monsters, who had been lying in the
-reeds and mud, raised themselves on their short legs, and looked around
-at the intruders, while big ones and little ones slumped into the water
-on each side, some of them swimming toward the boat, and some of them
-away from it.
-
-“I’m going to take a crack at one of them,” said Phil, picking up the
-rifle.
-
-“No, no!” said Coot. “Don’t do that. Wait till we float down.”
-
-“Why, we can’t get a better chance than we have now,” said Phil. “We
-don’t frighten them a bit.”
-
-“But that ain’t the way,” said the other. “You’ve got to hunt ’em the
-right way, or it’s no good.”
-
-So they rowed on still farther, and the creek became a little narrower,
-while the number of alligators greatly increased. Several times Coot
-touched one of them with the end of the oar, and a big fellow rose
-right under the boat, giving it quite a jar.
-
-“Look here!” said Coot, with a troubled expression. “I never see ’em as
-thick as this afore. This warm weather has brought ’em out.”
-
-“We might as well shoot some of them,” said Chap. “We can never have a
-better chance.”
-
-“Don’t you do it,” cried Coot. “You’ll make ’em mad, and they’ll pitch
-in and clean us up in less than no time.”
-
-“What’s the good of coming,” said Phil, “if we can’t shoot them when we
-see them.”
-
-“Wait till we git where there ain’t so many,” said Coot. “I reckon
-they’re scarcer higher up.”
-
-“Queer way of hunting,” remarked Phœnix, “when you look for a place
-where the game is scarce.”
-
-At this moment an immense alligator, with a body apparently nearly as
-big around as a barrel, who had been standing on the bank intently
-watching the boat as it passed, waddled hastily into the water, and
-swam directly after it. Coot saw the approaching creature, and, with a
-sudden exclamation, he began to tug wildly at the oars. Phil seized the
-rifle, and turned toward the alligator.
-
-“Don’t fire!” screamed Coot. “You’ll rile him awful! You’ll rile ’em
-all! Put down the gun!”
-
-Unwillingly Phil laid down the rifle, and Brewer rowed as hard as he
-could. The alligator did not pursue them long, but soon disappeared
-beneath the surface of the water; but this did not allay the fears of
-the oarsman.
-
-“He ain’t gin up yet,” he gasped. “He’ll come up in a minnit, right
-under us, and then over we’ll go!”
-
-[Illustration: “Don’t fire!” screamed Coot.]
-
-This was not a cheerful prospect, and the boys would have assisted in
-the rowing had there been any spare oars.
-
-But although Mr. Brewer was a small man, he was very vigorous, and he
-pulled away bravely. At the end of about five minutes of this violent
-exercise he stopped and rested.
-
-The big alligator had not reappeared, and at the point where they then
-were there were no alligators to be seen either in the water or on the
-shore.
-
-Coot looked around him. On the right hand of the stream the shore was
-low and marshy, but on the side nearest the town, the bank was a little
-higher than it had been, and between the creek and the forest, about a
-quarter of a mile away, there was a level stretch of dry land, covered
-with coarse grass.
-
-“I tell you what we kin do,” said Coot. “There’s a road over thar in
-the woods that leads straight to town. ’Taint much of a road, but it’ll
-do to walk in, and it won’t be long before we kin strike it. I say,
-let’s land here, and walk to town. We kin git thar easy in three or
-four hours.”
-
-“What do you mean?” cried Phil. “Leave this boat here, and the
-sail-boat in the river?”
-
-“Yes, sir,” said Coot. “You don’t ketch me goin’ down among all them
-’gators ag’in. I wouldn’t do it for all the money in the world! We
-kin come after the sail-boat to-morrow, and as for this dinky, we’ll
-have to leave her. It’s a pity for Bill Hawkins to lose his dinky,
-but what’s a little boat like this to being scrunched up by a lot of
-’gators!”
-
-“It will be a mighty mean thing to leave the man’s boat here!”
-exclaimed Phil, “and I’m not going to do it!”
-
-“Nor I either!” cried Chap and Phœnix, in a breath.
-
-“All right!” said Coot, pulling toward the shore. “I’m goin’ to land
-and walk to town, and if you choose to run back through all them
-’gators you kin do it. I ain’t got no way to hender you.”
-
-“What did you come for, if you’re afraid?” asked Chap.
-
-“I didn’t think there was so many of ’em, or I wouldn’t ’a’ come,” was
-the cool reply.
-
-When the boat touched the bank he put down the oars and jumped ashore.
-
-“I’ll take the shot-gun,” he said, “’cause I don’t want to lose any
-of John’s things. And you might as well give me them victuals you’ve
-wrapped up, for if the ’gators don’t eat you, you’ll git to the boat
-before you’re hungry; and I’m likely to want something on the way.”
-
-The gun and the luncheon were handed to him without a word, and he
-began to make his way over the level ground toward the woods.
-
-Chap and Phœnix now each took an oar, and pushed off, while Phil sat in
-the stern.
-
-“Did you ever see such a good-for-nothing, contemptible coward as that,
-in all your life?” said Chap, not waiting until Coot should be entirely
-out of hearing.
-
-“I never did,” said Phil.
-
-“Nor I,” added Phœnix. “But for one, I’m glad we’re rid of him. He
-wasn’t a bit of good to us. And now, what are we going to do?”
-
-“Go back to the boat as soon as we can, I should say,” said Phil.
-
-“Right through the alligators?” said Chap.
-
-“There isn’t any other way that I know of,” replied Phil; “and we might
-as well do it first as last.”
-
-“All right,” said Chap and Phœnix; and turning the boat, they began to
-row down-stream.
-
-“You’d better go slowly when you get among them,” said Phil; “and of
-course we won’t fire at them. I guess that Coot was right when he
-thought that it wouldn’t do to rouse their angry passions when we are
-among them.”
-
-“It is a shame to leave all those splendid teeth and hides here, but I
-suppose it can’t be helped,” said Chap.
-
-“I’d rather leave the teeth here than to have them in me,” said Phœnix;
-“and I guess I wouldn’t want to wrestle with an alligator for his
-hide, either.”
-
-They soon reached the part of the creek where the alligators began
-to be numerous, and as they rowed on, they found that the sun had
-got higher, and as the day had become warmer the number of the ugly
-creatures who were basking in the sunshine was much greater than before.
-
-The boys rowed very gently, and the alligators paid but little heed to
-the boat, except as they regarded it as an object of curiosity.
-
-Many of them seemed engaged in crossing the stream, and Phil frequently
-called out to the boys to slacken up a little or they would run into
-the lazy fellows.
-
-On the banks some of them were lying perfectly still, as if they were
-asleep, while others moved sluggishly about, occasionally turning their
-heads and yawning, opening their great mouths so wide that the boys
-could see half-way down their throats.
-
-Sometimes the boys were quite frightened, especially when the swimming
-beasts came near them; and once, when an enormous fellow rose close to
-the boat, and suddenly turning gave it a tremendous stroke with his
-tail, the boys thought, for an instant, that it was the creature’s
-intention to upset them. But the blow was not repeated, and they
-breathed easier.
-
-It was impossible, however, to look upon the horrid heads and writhing
-bodies of these great, lizard-like creatures without disgust and fear,
-especially when they were so numerous and so near.
-
-“Nobody can say we haven’t seen alligators,” said Chap, as the boat
-slowly moved on.
-
-“No, indeed!” said Phœnix; “but as far as I am concerned, I never want
-to lay eyes on one again.”
-
-“Look at that wretch!” exclaimed Phil. “I really believe he was going
-to take hold of your oar.”
-
-“I hope none of them will do that,” said Chap, looking round
-apprehensively, “for I want to get out of this, and I don’t want to
-trust to floating down, either.”
-
-Fearful as the boys were that they might at any moment run afoul of
-some bad-tempered creature, they kept steadily on, and at last, in
-safety, reached the mouth of the creek.
-
-Even here an occasional alligator showed itself, but the boys took no
-notice of these, and rowed swiftly toward The Rolling Stone.
-
-“Hurrah, boys!” cried Chap, when they had made the small boat fast to
-the other. “Now, at last, we are masters of our own vessel! This is
-splendid! Nobody on board to tell us what to do!”
-
-“It won’t be so splendid,” said Phœnix, “if we can’t get her up to
-town.”
-
-“But we can,” cried Phil. “I can sail a boat better than that Coot
-Brewer.”
-
-“You’ll have to do that,” said Chap, “or I won’t go along with you. I
-don’t think Coot knew anything about sailing. How he is going to get
-his boat down to his brother’s is more than I know. His business in
-life is to hunt alligators.”
-
-“Yes,” said Phil, “and to do it the way he likes he’s got to go where
-game is scarce.”
-
-“And that’s in the woods,” said Phœnix.
-
-Phil had had a good many lessons in sailing a boat from his uncle, Mr.
-Godfrey Berkeley, and all the boys had profited greatly by observing
-Adam’s method of managing the boat, consequently they felt quite
-delighted to have the opportunity of doing some sailing for themselves.
-
-Phil went to the helm; Chap took charge of the main-sheet line, and
-Phœnix made himself generally useful at the main-sail and the jib.
-
-The wind had got around to the east, and this was much in their favor.
-They pulled up the anchor, hauled up the sails, and set off bravely.
-
-Phil was a careful fellow, and watched for every flaw of wind, and Chap
-was very prompt to let out the sheet as soon as ordered.
-
-“I want you to understand, Phil,” said Chap, “that as I am captain, I
-give you orders to let me know every time you want the main-sheet let
-out.”
-
-“All right, captain,” said Phil. “Discipline must be maintained.”
-
-“Boys,” remarked Phœnix, “I wish we had shot some alligators. We might
-have done it after we got to the mouth of the creek.”
-
-“Perhaps that’s so,” said Phil; “but I was too anxious to get out
-from among them to think of anything else. I’d given up the shooting
-business.”
-
-“I’m afraid we were a little scared,” said Chap, “and that we’ll be
-laughed at when we get back without having fired a shot.”
-
-“Let them laugh,” said Phœnix. “It won’t hurt half as much as to have
-an alligator chewing at your legs.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVI.
-
-THE MAGGIE COMES TO TOWN.
-
-
-Had Adam Guy been at the helm of The Rolling Stone, it would probably
-have reached the pier at Titusville a couple of hours sooner than it
-did under the guidance of the three boys. But it reached there finally,
-and our young friends were too glad to have made a safe passage to
-grumble about the slowness of it.
-
-When the story about the alligators and the desertion of Coot was told
-at the hotel, it created a good deal of merriment and also some hearty
-condemnation of Brewer, who had not yet arrived in town.
-
-Adam came up to the hotel, having seen the boat come in, and when he
-heard the story he was very indignant.
-
-“I never oughter let you go with such a miserable good-for-nothin’
-feller. He thought of nothin’ but savin’ his own wretched skin, and
-I’ve a great mind to thrash it all off of him as soon as I ketch sight
-of him.”
-
-“Don’t do that,” shouted the colonel, “for then he can’t get away, and
-we don’t want him here. This is the last time Coot Brewer ever takes
-anybody in a boat from this town.”
-
-Adam was just about to leave the house, being anxious to finish that
-day the job of work he had undertaken, when he stopped on the piazza,
-and called out,--
-
-“Hello! Here comes the dirty Maggie.”
-
-At this everybody came out. The story of the boat-thieves had been
-told, and had excited a good deal of interest. The young men had come
-from parts unknown, and had been regarded with disfavor in the town
-before they started on their river trip. They had hired a boat of a
-negro, no one else being willing to trust them with one.
-
-“They’ve been a long time getting here,” said Phil.
-
-“I shouldn’t wonder,” said Adam, “if they’d been a-hangin’ back till we
-got away.”
-
-“That’s so,” said the colonel. “And now you fellows make yourselves
-scarce, and keep out of the way till they come up, and then we’ll hear
-what they have to say for themselves. If they see you, I shouldn’t
-wonder if they put off again.”
-
-Our friends then retired into the dining-room, where, with doors shut
-and shutters partly closed, they watched the approach of the Maggie.
-
-The dirty little boat sailed slowly toward the town, and when it
-reached The Rolling Stone, which was moored some little distance out
-in the river, it stopped, and the two young men seemed to be carefully
-examining her. Apparently satisfied that everything belonging to our
-friends had been taken out, and that they had probably gone on their
-way, they came up to the pier, and soon reached the hotel. The colonel
-was sitting on the piazza, not far from the dining-room window.
-
-“Well,” said he, as the two fellows, now more untidy than ever,
-ascended the steps, “you’ve got back, have you?”
-
-“Yes,” said one of them, “here we are.”
-
-“Did you shoot much?” asked the colonel, gazing at them steadfastly.
-
-“Shoot!” cried the one who did the talking. “We didn’t do none at all.
-Our guns was stole. The fellers that took ’em said they’d leave ’em
-with you, and I hope you’ve got ’em.”
-
-A number of persons had now collected on the piazza, and the three boys
-and Adam were listening intently in the dining-room.
-
-“Your guns stolen!” shouted the colonel. “You must be a pretty couple
-of fellows to let your guns be taken from you.”
-
-“There was four of ’em that took ’em,” said the other, “and they was
-too many for us.”
-
-“I should think half a good man would be too many for you two,” said
-the colonel, who was beginning to talk louder and louder. “How did they
-come to steal them?”
-
-“They just wanted ’em, and they took ’em,” was the answer.
-
-The other young man now considered it necessary to put in a word:
-
-“We wasn’t just about when they took ’em. If we had been, they
-wouldn’t----”
-
-“Shut up!” roared the colonel. “I can’t stand any more such lying. I
-know all about you, and I know your guns were not stolen from you, and
-that you stole John Brewer’s sail-boat, with everything in it.”
-
-“We didn’t steal no boat,” was the surly reply. “That was a lie them
-fellers made up.”
-
-“You didn’t, eh?” cried the colonel. “I’ve some witnesses on hand
-that’ll say something about that.”
-
-Then, turning to the dining-room window, he shouted, “Come out here!”
-and immediately Adam and the three boys appeared.
-
-“Now, then,” said the colonel, “will you say before these persons that
-you did not steal a boat from them?”
-
-At first the two young men seemed utterly dismayed at the sight of the
-three boys and the man from whom they had stolen the boat, and whom
-they supposed were now far away. But as one of them fixed his eyes on
-Chap his dismay seemed to change into anger. His face grew very red,
-and he shook his fist at our long-legged young friend.
-
-“There’s the feller,” he cried, “who tried to kill me! He fired a gun
-straight at me, and not a dozen feet away, and I a-doin’ nothin’. It’s
-all very well to talk about a little trick we played on ’em about the
-boat, but here’s a feller who tried to murder me. If there’s any law in
-this land I’ll have it on him!”
-
-The colonel turned to Chap.
-
-“Is that so?” he said.
-
-Chap admitted that the main facts were true, and then explained how it
-had all happened, but the colonel interrupted him, and leaning forward
-in his chair, as if he would jump out of it, he shouted at him,--
-
-“I wouldn’t have believed it of you! If there was a court sitting in
-this town, I’d have you brought before it this very day. I’m ashamed
-to have you in my house. If ever there was a boy who deserved being
-clapped into jail, it would be the one who fired at that fellow and
-didn’t hit him! If I had my way I’d put you into prison till you
-learned to shoot.”
-
-At this there was a great roar of laughter from everybody except the
-two young men, and to these the colonel now addressed himself.
-
-“There’s been a good many scoundrels in these parts, since I’ve lived
-here, but I never see any to beat you two. You steal other people’s
-property, and then you come here, and, right to my face, charge honest
-men with taking your things. I don’t believe you ever owned anything in
-your lives. And you want your guns, do you? Well, you hired them of Jim
-Randall,--I know all about it,--and you’ll pay for them from the day
-you took them till this minute.”
-
-One of the men attempted to say here that he hadn’t had them for ever
-so long.
-
-“Shut up!” roared the colonel. “You don’t suppose I’m going to let Jim
-be cheated out of his money, do you, just because other people had to
-take care of the guns to keep you from doing mischief?--Bob!”
-
-In a moment the negro boy appeared, and the colonel said to him,--
-
-“Go tell Jim Randall to come right here.--As soon as you’ve paid him,”
-he continued, turning to the young men, “you get out of this place.
-If the court sat this month, I’d have you up before it, but we’re not
-going to keep you here at the public expense, and you’ve got to make
-yourselves scarce. And I want every man, woman, and child in this
-town to understand,” he said, looking around at the people, “that not
-one of them is to harbor these fellows for a minute, or to speak to
-them, or to have anything to do with them. Here, Jim,” he said, as that
-individual approached, “what do these scamps owe you for your guns up
-to to-day?”
-
-Jim mentioned the sum.
-
-“Pay it!” was the command of the colonel to the young men. “Now pay for
-your boat. Here’s the man you hired it of. Now go!” roared the colonel,
-when this last order had been obeyed.
-
-The young men had brought a couple of knapsacks with them from the
-boat, and picking these up, they went. They had sense enough to see
-that there was nothing for them to do but to obey the autocrat of
-Titusville.
-
-These two miscreants had not been gone more than half an hour before
-Coot Brewer wandered into the town. He was very tired, and looked warm.
-
-When he entered the hotel, he was greeted with shouts of derision, and
-the colonel at once began to storm at him.
-
-“Coot Brewer!” he cried, “if ever you take anybody in a boat again from
-this place, I’ll have you horsewhipped!”
-
-Coot sat down, and smiled a languid smile.
-
-“You don’t ketch me takin’ out city chaps like them,” he said. “They
-draws ’gators.”
-
-At this another shout of laughter arose.
-
-“You dunderhead!” cried the colonel. “Don’t you know that if you’d
-fired at them, every ’gator would have skedaddled?”
-
-“Yes,” said Coot, “a-carryin’ off us fellers in their jaws.”
-
-Scolding and derision had very little effect on the brother of John
-Brewer. The colonel roared out his strongest condemnation of Coot’s
-conduct in deserting the boys, and everybody laughed at him for being
-afraid of the alligators, but the placid Coot smiled through it all. He
-had got safely away from the ’gators in Lowper’s Creek, and he did not
-care what happened now.
-
-Just before supper, there was another arrival in the town. This was the
-yacht containing the family-party which the boys had seen on Indian
-River.
-
-They came up to the hotel in a little procession, with their bundles,
-their valises, their baskets, their umbrellas, their fishing-rods,
-their canes they had cut, the little alligators they were carrying home
-in boxes, the shells they had picked up, and all the curious things
-they had gathered on their trip.
-
-The colonel sat, with an austere countenance, and watched them
-approaching. They had not stopped in Titusville when they passed
-through before, having gone directly on board the boat, which they had
-engaged by letter, and it soon appeared that they did not intend to
-stop now.
-
-The Winkyminky was to start early the next morning from Salt Lake,
-about seven miles away, and the head of the party considered it wise
-for them to go on that night to a house some three miles nearer the
-lake, so that they could the more easily reach the steamboat in the
-morning.
-
-“All right,” said the colonel. “Take the wagon and go along. I don’t
-want anybody here that don’t want to stop.”
-
-After supper, the colonel called Adam and the boys to him.
-
-“Look here,” he said. “You fellows have got to be sharp, or you won’t
-get off in the Winkyminky to-morrow. She’s a little tub, and don’t hold
-many people, and there’s a party down at the lake now, camping out,
-waiting for her. If this caravan, with their baskets, and bundles, and
-boxes of shells, get aboard first, there’ll be no room for you, and
-you’ll have to wait over a week. They hadn’t any right to come back
-before they said they were going to. I know Captain Root like a book,
-and if you get there first with a note from me, he’ll take you in, no
-matter who comes after you.”
-
-“We can’t stay here another week!” cried the boys, in consternation.
-
-“All right,” said the colonel. “You be up early, and I’ll put you
-through.”
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVII.
-
-THE RACE THROUGH THE WOODS.
-
-
-The boys and Adam were awakened very early on Wednesday morning by Bob,
-and the colonel gave them scarcely time enough to eat their breakfast.
-
-A wagon and two mules were at the back entrance to the hotel, and the
-colonel, bidding them a hasty good-by, told them to tumble in and be
-off.
-
-“You’ve got to go lively,” he cried, “to get ahead of those caravaners.
-And now, you Pete,” he shouted to the negro driver, “you make them
-mules git!”
-
-Pete whipped up, and away went our party along the sandy road that led
-out of Titusville. For a great part of the way the road lay through
-vast pine woods, where but few signs of life of any kind could be seen.
-
-Before very long, they came in sight of the lonely house where the
-“caravaners” had stopped, and Pete whipped up his mules, hoping to pass
-the house before the party started; but this hope was vain; for, before
-they got to the gate, two carts, each drawn by one horse, came hurrying
-out, and immediately took the narrow road, on which there was but room
-enough for a single vehicle.
-
-The two carts were piled high with people and baggage; but the horses
-were put to a gallop, and away they went, jogging and jolting over the
-rough road. Pete whipped up and galloped after them.
-
-“If we’d started three minutes sooner,” said Adam, “we’d been ahead of
-’em, and been aboard long afore they got there. Them horses can’t keep
-up that runnin’; but they can block the road for us, and that’s just as
-bad. A lot o’ people like that, just cruisin’ round for pleasure, ain’t
-got no right to swoop down without givin’ any notice, and swamp other
-folks that’s got no time to lose.”
-
-“Never mind,” said Pete, who was keeping his mules close to the tail of
-the hindmost cart. “There’s a place up here where I can pass ’em, and
-then you’ll see me cut ahead.”
-
-In a few minutes an open place in the woods was reached, where, for a
-short distance, there were two wagon tracks side by side, the road
-having been changed, the original track being in a soft place, and full
-of ruts and mud-holes.
-
-The moment he reached this old road, Pete dashed into it, whipping his
-mules into their wildest gallop. The wagon bumped and jolted over the
-rough places, the valises nearly bouncing out, while the boys were
-obliged to hold fast to their seats.
-
-The horses and the carts were put to the top of their speed, and having
-the best road, seemed likely to keep ahead of the wagon. But Pete
-was not to be defeated. He had waited patiently for this opportunity
-of passing, and he was bound to pass. The tough muscles of his mules
-seemed able to pull the wagon at full speed over any road, without a
-thought of tiring, while the horses and the heavily-laden carts were
-beginning to flag.
-
-With a crack of his heavy whip and a yell of triumph, Pete plunged
-ahead, and dashed into the other road a dozen yards in advance of the
-foremost cart.
-
-“Hurrah!” cried Adam. “Now we can cut right along for the boat.”
-
-“Dat’s so,” said Pete, his eyes sparkling and his mouth in a broad
-grin. “We’s done beat ’em! Dere ain’t no other place where they can
-pass, even if they could kitch up.”
-
-“Which they can’t do,” said Adam. “There ain’t no more run in them
-horses.”
-
-The three boys looked back. In the front cart was an old gentleman and
-an elderly lady, apparently his wife. These sat on one seat, while
-another lady, holding a little girl, sat on some luggage, and the
-driver, a negro boy, perched himself on a trunk in the front of the
-cart.
-
-In the second cart were two ladies, a short gentleman, in blue-flannel
-shirt and high boots, and a number of children, apparently all girls.
-These were piled upon valises and various articles of baggage, and
-altogether made a pretty heavy load for one horse.
-
-The hindmost cart now stopped, and the gentleman and two or three of
-the girls got out and walked to ease the poor horse. Both carts then
-came on at a slow pace, the party evidently having given up the hope of
-reaching the steamboat in time to be well accommodated.
-
-The boys now looked at each other.
-
-“Look here!” said Phil.
-
-“Fellows!” exclaimed Chap, at the same moment.
-
-“That’s so!” said Phœnix, as if he had known what the others were
-thinking of.
-
-“Stop!” cried Phil to Pete.
-
-The astonished negro drew up his mules, and Adam looked around.
-
-“Let’s take some of those children in here,” said Phil.
-
-“That’s so,” said Chap. “That’s just what I was going to say.”
-
-“Plenty of room here,” said Phœnix. “A big wagon, and no baggage to
-speak of.”
-
-“Yes,” said Phil, “and I think it would be a mean thing for us to go
-ahead, and get good rooms on the boat, and cut out all these ladies and
-children.”
-
-“Mean!” said Chap. “It made me feel like a boat-thief when we passed
-them. Let’s have them come along and get the best accommodations they
-can. We can stow ourselves away anywhere. Overcoats will do for beds,
-and our bags for pillows. It’s only a three-days’ trip. What do you
-say?”
-
-“I say do it, of course,” answered Phil.
-
-“So do I!” said Phœnix, emphatically.
-
-Adam listened to all this, and then, with a smile, he said,--
-
-“All right, if you all say so; but you’ll find pretty hard quarters if
-the boat is crowded and you’ve got no beds.”
-
-“Oh, we’ll get along,” said Chap. “Let’s go tell them.”
-
-And the three boys jumped out of the wagon, while Pete was heard to
-make some remarks which seemed to indicate that, without knowing it,
-he had undertaken to drive a load of idiots to the Winkyminky.
-
-The party in the carts seemed much surprised when the wagon stopped,
-but when the boys came back and made their offer to carry some of the
-children in the wagon, they were as much pleased as astonished, for
-they were feeling very much discouraged, having an idea that they were
-now going to have a pretty bad time on board the steamboat, and that
-she might even start off without them when the wagon reached her, and
-all her spare room was occupied.
-
-“Much obliged to you,” said the gentleman in the blue shirt, who was
-the father of the children. “It will help us ever so much if you will
-take a couple of these girls into your wagon. I’m afraid our horses
-will give out. We were talking about turning back, for I don’t believe
-the Winkyminky has got more than two vacant state-rooms.”
-
-“Oh, I guess we can all crowd aboard!” said Phil, cheerfully. “At any
-rate, we’ll try. We did think of going on ahead, but afterward made up
-our minds it would be better for all of us to go on together.”
-
-“It is very kind of you,” said the gentleman, looking steadfastly at
-the boys. “It is necessary for us to travel on as fast as possible.
-This outdoor life does not suit my father,” pointing to the old
-gentleman ahead, “as we hoped it would, and we want to get him to
-Jacksonville, where he can have more comfortable quarters.”
-
-“Why don’t the old gentleman and the ladies get into the wagon?” said
-Chap. “We can pile into the carts, or walk. I think it is better to
-walk than to ride over these roads.”
-
-This proposition was demurred to, but the boys insisted, and although
-the old gentleman and his wife declined to leave their seats in the
-cart, it being difficult for them to get in and out of vehicles, the
-three ladies and the girls were induced to get into the wagon, which
-Adam cheerfully vacated to give them more room.
-
-The procession now moved on, the gentleman with the blue shirt, who
-carried a gun, walking with Phil, while Adam and Phœnix walked close
-behind the wagon, to pick up any of the little girls who might fall out.
-
-Chap strode ahead of all. He liked to walk alone, and look about,
-and make observations for himself, and besides this, he happened to
-remember that he was captain of the Rolling Stones, and that, whenever
-it was practicable, it was proper for him to be in advance.
-
-When they reached Salt Lake they found the little steamer lying about a
-quarter of a mile from the shore, on which there was no sign of pier or
-landing-place.
-
-The wagons and carts drove directly into the lake, the bottom being
-hard sand, and splashed along to the Winkyminky. When they reached
-it, the water was a little over the hubs of the wheels, and when the
-vehicles in turn drove up to the side of the boat it was easy, even for
-the old gentleman and his wife, to step directly on to the lower deck.
-There was a small flat-boat near the shore, into which the pedestrians
-got, and a negro boy poled them to the steamboat.
-
-The little Winkyminky was very much crowded, there being a dozen
-passengers on board when our friends arrived, but the old couple and
-the ladies were accommodated with beds, the captain giving up his room;
-the children were to be stowed into various corners, while the men and
-boys cheerfully undertook to find places to sleep when night came.
-
-At first the boys wondered that larger steamboats were not put upon
-this line, so that passengers could be more comfortably accommodated,
-but they had not gone very far before they found why the Winkyminky was
-so small.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVIII.
-
-A PLOT AGAINST CHAP.
-
-
-When everybody who was going had leisurely gone on board the little
-steamboat, and the two or three negroes who were not going had
-deliberately got off into the flat-boat, and the engineer and fireman
-had followed the example of everybody else on board, and had gone to
-take a look at Adam’s little bears, which he had brought with great
-care from Titusville, stowed away in the front part of the wagon, and
-when there really seemed to be no reason why a start should not be
-made, the anchor was hauled up and the engineer signalled to go ahead.
-
-Among the passengers were the two young men who had stolen the boat;
-but they kept as much out of the way as possible, appearing especially
-anxious to avoid Adam and the boys. They spent most of the time in the
-engine-room and lived with the crew, probably hoping that by so doing
-the story of their misdemeanors and banishment from Titusville might
-not be told on board.
-
-The boys, however, knew that they were on the boat; but, as they had
-not the slightest desire either to speak to them or look at them, the
-two miscreants were avoided quite as much as they wished to be.
-
-After leaving the lake, which is a small body of water, the boat
-entered a narrow stream, which twisted and turned and bent back upon
-itself in such curious loops and curves, that few persons would have
-supposed it navigable by a steamer, until they had seen the Winkyminky
-perform the feat.
-
-Sometimes the turn was so sudden that the bow of the boat almost
-touched the back, while the stern barely swept clear of it at the other
-end of the curve. In such cases the engine was stopped, and the boat
-pushed around the curve by the negro hands with long poles, which they
-thrust against the bank.
-
-Often when they had just pushed the boat around one curve, they had to
-run to the other side of the deck to pole her around another, which
-bent in an opposite direction. None but a very small vessel would have
-made the necessary turns, and the boys were not surprised at her size
-when they saw the peculiar work she had to do. Anything larger than
-that could not have got along that stream at all. Even after they at
-last got into the upper waters of the St. John’s, the river was, at
-some points, very narrow.
-
-The country they passed through was almost entirely uninhabited,
-although they sometimes stopped at a lonely wharf to take on vegetables
-or fruits, which were brought from the hummock farms, generally lying a
-little back from the river.
-
-Alligators were plentiful along the banks. Water-fowl and other birds
-were in great numbers everywhere, and the boys had a very good time
-fishing for black bass from the stern of the little steamer. They
-caught enough to supply everybody on board with fresh fish during the
-entire trip, and many of the passengers, including the gentleman in the
-blue shirt, spent most of their time shooting at the alligators and
-birds.
-
-The captain was a pleasant man, and talked a good deal with the boys.
-
-“It seems pretty hard,” he once said to them, “to get a boat along
-this narrow and crooked stream, but there are times in the year when I
-have no trouble at all. When the waters are high all this flat country
-is overflowed, and, as my boat only draws two feet of water, I sail
-right straight along over all this land that you see here, and pay no
-attention at all to the bed of the stream, wherever it may happen to
-be.”
-
-After a slow passage of two nights and parts of three days, they
-entered a broad lake, on one side of which was situated the town of
-Enterprise, and on the other that of Sanford.
-
-Without stopping at the first, they proceeded to the last-named place,
-and the boys had scarcely scrambled upon the long pier when they were
-met by a portly gentleman, in a white necktie and broad straw hat, who,
-after asking their names, handed Phil a telegram. Phil hastily tore
-open the envelope, and read the following message:
-
- “To Philip Berkeley, Sanford, Florida: Telegraph to Inman House,
- Jacksonville, by what boat you leave Sanford. Call there on arrival.
-
- “JOHN ROBINSON.”
-
-This was a message sent by Mr. Godfrey Berkeley, and put in charge of a
-gentleman with whom Mr. Berkeley had an acquaintance, and who resided
-at Sanford. Mr. Berkeley knew that the boys must stop at this place in
-coming from the Indian River, and there had been time to write to the
-gentleman, as well as to telegraph. He and Helen did not wish the boys
-to know that they would meet them at Jacksonville, and the message was
-sent so as to make it sure that the boys would not be missed when they
-arrived at that place.
-
-Phil and his two friends were very much surprised when they read the
-message, for they could not imagine who John Robinson might be. When
-they made inquiries in regard to this point of the stately gentleman,
-that individual waved his hand and raised his eyebrows.
-
-“It is not to be supposed,” he said, “that I should be cognizant of
-the personality of the gentleman who sent this message. All I have
-undertaken to do was to meet every boat which arrived from the locality
-from which you set forth, and when I should have the honor of meeting
-you to deliver you the message. If there is anything more I can do for
-you, I hope you will command my services.”
-
-“I suppose,” said Phil, “that this John Robinson is somebody in
-Jacksonville to whom our money has been sent, and he has telegraphed
-here so that we can go to him and get it.”
-
-The stately gentleman was further interrogated, but he dismissed all
-remarks relating to John Robinson with a majestic wave of his hand, and
-proceeded to other topics. He was very kind, however; took them all,
-including Adam, to his house to supper, and gave them a great deal of
-information in regard to their trip to Jacksonville.
-
-After going over to Enterprise for some freight, the Winkyminky
-intended to proceed to Jacksonville, but they had been told at
-Titusville that it would be better to take a larger and faster boat,
-if they could do so. The William Von Glode, the stately gentleman
-informed them, would, by a fortunate concatenation of circumstances,
-leave Sanford at about eight o’clock that evening, and he advised them
-to take passage in her.
-
-Some hours would elapse before the Von Glode started, and there was
-time enough for the boys to walk about the place.
-
-Before supper, Adam, who knew people here, and had heard where he could
-get a good job of work in repairing and refitting a boat,--for he was a
-boat-builder as well as a sailor,--had gone to see about this business,
-and was returning, when he noticed the two boat-thieves sitting under a
-tree by the side of the road.
-
-He did not wish to speak to these fellows, nor did he care to pass them
-without a word. They had their faces turned away from him, and as there
-was a high board fence behind them, Adam went through a gate into the
-lot enclosed by this fence, so that he might altogether avoid these two
-fellows.
-
-The board fence was not a very tight one, and as in passing the place
-where they sat he was but a short distance from them, he heard some
-words which made him stop.
-
-“The long-legged fellow is always keeping to himself,” were the words
-that he heard.
-
-Now, as Chap was pre-eminently a long-legged fellow, this remark
-instantly recalled to Adam’s mind the captain of The Rolling Stone,
-and this suggestion was made stronger by the fact that Adam had noticed
-that Chap was very fond of separating himself from the company, and
-doing something on his own account.
-
-If these men were talking about Chap, it could bode no good to that
-young man, and Adam wanted to hear what should be said. So he stopped.
-
-“If I can git a hold of him,” was the next remark, “I’ll pay him off
-square.”
-
-“Yes,” said the other one, “and I’d like to pay off that no-account
-sea-rat. If it hadn’t been for him we’d ’a’ had our guns.”
-
-“That’s so,” said the other; “but it won’t do to tackle the whole lot
-of ’em. If we can git hold of the feller that knocked us into the water
-and fired at me, we can give him his share and the sailor’s too.”
-
-“I’m bound to bag some kind of game,” said the other, “and he suits me
-better than any. What we’ve got to do is to keep a sharp eye on him
-and we’re pretty sure to git a chance. The boat don’t start till after
-dark.”
-
-Adam did not care to hear any more. It was plain enough that the two
-men intended to be revenged on Chap, and, as usually happens, they were
-the more determined on vengeance because they had deserved all they had
-suffered.
-
-The point now was, what could he do to prevent this piece of rascality?
-for something must be done instantly, and the important thing was to
-warn Chap.
-
-If the boys could be kept together until they went on board the
-steamboat, there would be no further trouble, for he was certain that
-the two rascals did not intend to take passage on the Von Glode.
-
-Having settled these points in his mind, he set off for the house of
-the stately gentleman, which was on the main street of the town.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIX.
-
-HOW ADAM WAS BAGGED.
-
-
-When Adam reached the house, the family had just sat down to supper,
-and that meal had been prepared for him in another room. He did not
-think it necessary to disturb the little company.
-
-He asked one of the servants to give him notice as soon as the supper
-should be over, and then he sat down to his own meal.
-
-Before very long he heard the sound of chairs pushed back from the
-table, and then the colored woman informed him that “the folks had done
-finished.”
-
-Instantly Adam arose and hurried to the front of the house. There upon
-the porch he saw Phil and Phœnix, and calling them to him, he hurriedly
-asked where Chap was.
-
-“Oh,” said Phœnix, “it don’t take him long to eat. He got through
-before any of us, and asked to be excused. I suppose there is something
-in the town that he wants to investigate.”
-
-Adam almost turned pale when he heard this.
-
-Quickly informing the boys of the plot against their companion, he told
-them that no time must be lost in finding Chap and keeping him with
-them.
-
-No one had observed which way he had gone, but from his habits and his
-love of the water, it was probable that he had strolled either up or
-down the shore of the lake.
-
-“You run along that way,” said Adam, “and mind you keep together, for
-if them chaps get hold of one of you alone, they may make it bad for
-him. I’ll go down-shore. I ain’t afraid of ’em.”
-
-And with this, the party separated.
-
-On their different ways through the town they met several persons, but
-nobody had seen Chap.
-
-Adam soon found himself in the woods, where there were open spaces
-among the trees near the water, which allowed him to hurry along quite
-rapidly and to see to a considerable distance. He was certain he was
-on the right track, for in the sand near the water he saw the print of
-shoes, with a peculiar crack across the sole of one of them, which he
-had often noticed when Chap was stretched at full length on board The
-Rolling Stone.
-
-[Illustration: “Now we’ll give it to him.”]
-
-Greatly encouraged by this, he followed the track, and just as he
-vaulted over the trunk of a fallen palmetto, he caught sight of Chap
-some distance head. He was crouched down, examining something at the
-water’s edge.
-
-Adam was just about to call to him, when he was suddenly enveloped in
-darkness. Something had fallen over his head, which blinded and almost
-choked him.
-
-Then, through the coarse bag which had been thrown over him, he heard
-the words, spoken close to his ear,--
-
-“Now we’ll give it to him.”
-
-And almost at the same moment a tremendous blow from a club fell upon
-his back and shoulder.
-
-The two boat-thieves had been following Chap, intending to throw the
-bag over his head, and then punish him to their hearts’ content; but,
-perceiving the approach of Adam, they had hidden themselves behind the
-roots of a fallen tree, and when the sailor had jumped over the trunk
-and stood close to them, with his back toward them, they determined to
-give him the first taste of their revenge.
-
-The instant that Adam felt the blow, he turned upon the fellow who held
-the bag over his head, and twisted him around in the direction from
-which the blow had come. But the man with the club skipped around and
-dealt the sailor another blow. Thereupon, Adam, feeling that he was at
-a great disadvantage in being blinded, and having an assailant free to
-whang him with a club, instantly clutched the man he held with a firmer
-grip, and tripped him up, both falling heavily to the ground.
-
-Adam was a good wrestler, and could easily have thrown himself on his
-antagonist had he so chosen, but, instead of doing this, he rolled over
-so that the man he held in his strong arms was above him. In this way
-it was not easy to strike him without hitting the other fellow.
-
-It is possible that the man who held the bag around Adam’s neck thought
-that he had, by his own skill, put himself above the sailor. At any
-rate, he raised his head, and said to his companion,--
-
-“I can hold him here, and you run down and whang that long-legs. He
-hasn’t heard us, and you can slip up behind him. Be quick, now!”
-
-The other fellow then left, and, being barefooted, he moved silently
-down toward Chap.
-
-As soon as there had been time for him to get a little distance away,
-Adam, who had been lying on the ground, as if thoroughly exhausted by
-his brief struggle, suddenly revived, and, giving himself a vigorous
-twist, turned the other fellow under him, and grasping him by the
-throat, tore the bag off his own head with a jerk. Then Adam, giving
-a great shout, which echoed through the woods, proceeded to pound the
-miscreant under him as if he desired to punish him not only for the
-crimes he had done, but for those he intended to commit.
-
-Chap, who was busily examining a curious little sulphur spring, which
-was bubbling up near the edge of the lake, lifting the wet sand as if
-some living creature was buried beneath and trying to get out, raised
-himself up when he heard Adam shout, and turned around just in time to
-see the boat-thief close upon him with his club in the air.
-
-Chap was not as strong a boy as Phœnix, but he was long-limbed, and
-very excitable, and his fiery energy gave him much advantage for a
-brief struggle. Without the slightest hesitation he made a dash at the
-man with the club, and springing to one side as the blow fell, he threw
-his long arms around the fellow’s waist. The club, of course, was of no
-use in such a close encounter, and dropping it, the man made a grasp
-with one hand at Chap’s neck and throat. But Chap, as Phil had often
-said, was a fellow full of hinges, and jerking himself back to avoid
-this clutch, he did so with such suddenness that the man he held was
-pulled violently forward, while one of Chap’s feet went down into the
-soft, bubbling sand he had been watching. Thus, losing his footing,
-Chap went over backward, and the man with him, and both were instantly
-rolling in the water and soft sand.
-
-Chap was almost choked by the sand and water, but, throwing himself
-around like a wild cuttlefish, he managed to get upon his knees and
-raise his head and body out of the water, which was not more than a
-foot deep, although he seemed to be sinking at least that far into the
-soft sand.
-
-The man, who had loosened himself from Chap’s grasp, was near him, and
-struggling to rise, his dripping face full of rage and astonishment.
-But Chap gave him no opportunity to do this. Throwing himself upon him
-he pushed the fellow backward till his head went down again under the
-water, but, not wishing to drown him, he jerked his head up again, and
-sitting astride of him began to harangue him.
-
-The man was half lying down, with the water up to his chin, and vainly
-endeavoring to raise himself by his arms.
-
-“So you were going to sneak up behind me and hit me with a club, were
-you, you cowardly scoundrel?” said Chap. “It would serve you right if I
-were to push you back and drown you.”
-
-“Let me up!” cried the man. “I’m sinking down into this sand. There’s
-quicksands here, don’t you know? Let me up! We’ll both sink into ’em!”
-
-“Let you up? Not I!” said Chap. “There’s a bubbling sulphur spring
-right under you, and I’ve a great mind to push you down into it. I
-believe you’d go slam-bang to the centre of the earth. I’m all right.
-I can feel solid ground on each side of you. I can just put my foot on
-you, and cram you down.”
-
-“Don’t you do it! Don’t you do it!” yelled the man, who was frightened
-almost out of his senses.
-
-At this moment Adam appeared upon the scene. He had sufficiently
-punished his antagonist, and, having torn the bag into two strips, had
-tied him hand and foot with masterly sailor-knots. He had then hastened
-to Chap’s assistance, but when he reached him he found that young man
-getting on very well without his aid.
-
-He laughed when he saw the state of affairs, and then he stepped into
-the water, and helped Chap to his feet. The other fellow attempted to
-rise, but he was so embedded in the soft sand that he was unable to do
-so, and Chap and Adam reached into the water, and, each seizing him by
-one leg, pulled him out. Adam picked up the club the fellow had dropped
-in his struggle with Chap, and, seizing the man by the collar, made him
-rise to his feet.
-
-“Now,” said the sailor, “you come along with me, and if you give me any
-trouble I’ll break your head.”
-
-The three then proceeded rapidly to the place where the other rascal
-was lying, and, his feet being untied, Chap took him in charge, and the
-party set off at a good pace for the town, Adam relating to Chap by the
-way what he had heard and what had happened.
-
-The stately gentleman was a magistrate, and before him the two fellows
-were taken, and when their attempted crime was told it created great
-excitement in the place. The men were committed to stand their trial at
-the next term of the court, which would be held in about a week.
-
-Phil and Phœnix had returned while the examination was going on, and
-were as much astonished as Adam and Chap were to hear the magistrate
-say that the sailor and the young man who had been attacked must remain
-in the town to appear in the court as witnesses; otherwise, no charge
-could be proved.
-
-“This is a bad piece of business,” said Phil, as he stepped out on the
-porch.
-
-“That’s so,” said Phœnix; “but none of us could have got off to-night,
-for the Von Glode has gone. She started before we got back to town.”
-
-“But we could have got off in a day or two,” said Phil, “and now we may
-have to wait ten days or more. It is not likely this case will be the
-first one taken up. What do you think of it, Chap?”
-
-But Chap was not there. He had vanished somewhere into the darkness.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXX.
-
-THE COUNTESS.
-
-
-Phil, Phœnix, and Adam were naturally much amazed by this second
-disappearance of Chap, which took place immediately after the
-magistrate’s examination; but all conjectures and surmises were soon
-put to an end by the arrival of a note from Chap, which was brought by
-a negro boy. It was written on the back of a business card, and read
-thus:
-
- “DEAR BOYS: I can’t stay to any court. Let Adam testify. You can go
- away by the first boat that stops at Sanford. I am going to catch the
- Winkyminky. She starts from Enterprise to-night. I’ll wait for you in
- Jacksonville. Good-by.
- “CHAP.”
-
-The three gazed at each other in astonishment, as they read this note
-by a light in their host’s hall, and when that gentleman came out to
-invite them to make their home in his house while they stayed in the
-town, they were obliged to tell him of their friend’s disappearance. He
-was very much surprised at the information.
-
-“He cannot take the Winkyminky,” he said, “for that boat will not stop
-at this town to-night. Your young friend has been mistaken in his
-plans, and will probably return to the shelter of my roof ere long.”
-
-The boys knew Chap, and did not believe one word of this. They were
-greatly disturbed, and searched and inquired everywhere for news of
-him. They heard nothing, however, until about twelve o’clock, when a
-small boat, containing two negroes, came in from the lake, and the men
-reported that they had taken Chap out to meet the Winkyminky, and that
-when that boat had come along she had stopped and taken him on board.
-
-“That’s just like Chap,” said Phil.
-
-And Phœnix and Adam agreed that it was.
-
-There was nothing for them to do but to wait till another boat should
-go down the river, and then to follow their captain, who, it must be
-admitted, had a rather curious way of leading his men.
-
-As soon as Chap had heard what the magistrate said about his remaining
-as a witness, he felt that if he stayed in that room an instant longer
-he would be compelled, by some legal process, to appear at the next
-term of court, and he, therefore, slipped out of a side door and ran
-down to the river. The Von Glode was gone, but he felt he must get away
-from that town. Adam intended to stay there, anyway, and he could give
-all the testimony that would be needed; and as for Phil and Phœnix,
-they had seen nothing of the assault in the woods, and, therefore,
-would be free to leave by the first boat that came along. He was the
-only one that would be put to any trouble, and he must get away.
-
-He remembered that the Winkyminky was going to Jacksonville, and he
-wondered if she had yet left Enterprise. If not, there might be some
-way of his getting across the lake, and taking passage in her. The
-money that had been advanced by the colonel had been divided, as Phœnix
-declined to be treasurer when he did not supply the funds, and Chap had
-enough with him to pay his passage.
-
-At this moment a small boat, rowed by two negroes, came in from the
-lake, and Chap found that they had just come across from Enterprise.
-
-The Winkyminky, they informed him, was preparing to start when they
-left, but she had not passed this point yet, and they could row him out
-to meet her. Chap then hastily wrote a note by the light of a lantern
-on the pier, and sending it to the boys, was taken out to meet the
-Winkyminky.
-
-When that little steamboat came along the captain stopped and took
-Chap on board. His advent occasioned a great deal of surprise, but a
-comfortable state-room was given him, for all the Winkyminky’s Indian
-River passengers had left her at Sanford.
-
-But the next morning he found that there were three passengers who had
-come on board at Enterprise. One of these was an old gentleman, another
-was a very respectable negro woman, and the third was a lady.
-
-The old gentleman was tall and thin, with a high shirt collar, and
-military bearing. He was a communicative person, and soon made friends
-with Chap, giving him a great deal of information on various subjects.
-
-“Do you see that lady sitting over there by herself?” he said. “Well,
-sir, you don’t often see anybody like that in this country, sir.”
-
-“What’s the matter with her, sir?” asked Chap.
-
-“Well, sir, she is a countess. Did you ever see one before?”
-
-“Never, to know it,” said Chap, “except in pictures.”
-
-“Well, that is one, sir. She is a republican by birth, from some
-place in the North, but she married a Spanish count, and they have an
-orange-grove in the back country here.”
-
-“Is it necessary for her to hold herself aloof?” asked Chap.
-
-“Aloof!” said the old gentleman.
-
-“Yes,” said Chap; “she has been alone since I first saw her. I should
-think she’d be glad to have somebody to talk to.”
-
-“She might,” said the other, “if she could meet with persons of her
-own rank and station. But, otherwise, she would probably prefer to be
-aloof, as you call it, sir.”
-
-About half an hour after this, Chap borrowed a fishing-line from the
-cook, for all his traps had been left at Sanford, and went to the stern
-of the boat, where the countess sat with a novel in her hand. Taking
-a position not far from her, he threw out his line, and let it troll
-behind the boat.
-
-After a while she raised her eyes from her book and, looking at Chap,
-asked,--
-
-“What are you fishing for?”
-
-“Good!” said Chap to himself. “She has broken through her feudal bonds,
-and speaks to the masses.”
-
-And then, aloud, he answered,--
-
-“Anything I can get. Did your grace ever try trolling from a steamboat?”
-
-“No,” said the lady, with a laugh. “My grace never did. Why do you call
-me that?”
-
-“It was the nearest I could come to it,” said Chap. “I should be glad
-to know just what to say.”
-
-“So long as we are not in Spain, madam will do very well,” said the
-countess. “And now tell me, how did you come to get on board here, at
-night, all by yourself?”
-
-Chap freely related the reasons for his coming on board the Winkyminky,
-which greatly interested the countess; and then, working backward with
-his story, he told what had happened since he left home. This account
-took a long time, and was only interrupted by the hauling in of one
-large cat-fish, which greatly horrified the countess, and induced her
-to ask Chap to put up his line and confine himself to his story, which
-she found more entertaining than her novel.
-
-In spite of the fact that Chap did not belong to an aristocratic
-circle, the countess was very glad to talk to him, for he was the only
-person on board in whom she could take the slightest interest, and they
-soon became very well acquainted.
-
-She was going, with her negro servant, to join her husband in
-Jacksonville, and had intended to take passage from Enterprise in the
-Von Glode; but she was too late for that boat, and was obliged to take
-the Winkyminky. This inconvenient little boat did not suit her taste at
-all; but she had to make the best of it, and was very glad to have on
-board such an original and pleasant boy as Chap.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXI.
-
-A POINT OF HONOR.
-
-
-Nearly all that day the Winkyminky paddled bravely on her way, and
-then, all of a sudden, she stopped. A large cog-wheel, which was a
-part of her machinery, had broken. The engineer had known this wheel
-was going to break; but he hoped it would last till they got to
-Jacksonville.
-
-Everybody was greatly disturbed at this accident, especially when the
-captain told them it could not have occurred in a worse place.
-
-The Winkyminky drew but little water, and thus was sometimes enabled to
-make short cuts that a larger boat would not attempt, and, being a very
-slow craft, she saved distance whenever she could.
-
-To avoid a long curve, she had gone inside of a wooded island, and here
-the accident had taken place. No large steamboat could come to her
-assistance here; but the captain said that the Rosa, the only small
-boat that would leave Jacksonville that week, would probably be along
-in a day or two, and would, most likely, pass inside the island. Then,
-he said, he would see what he could do to prevail upon her to turn back
-and tow his boat to the city.
-
-This was poor comfort to the passengers, and they grumbled greatly; but
-nothing came of the grumbling, and they went to bed that night with the
-steamboat anchored near a small island, which shut it out from view of
-the body of the river, while the main shore, a hundred or more yards
-away, was wild and uninhabited.
-
-In the morning it was found that they were out of fresh water, but the
-captain said that about half a mile down-stream, on the main shore,
-there was a spring, and having put a barrel on board a small boat, he
-sent two of his hands to fill it with water.
-
-Of course, Chap instantly demanded permission to go in the boat, and
-much to everybody’s surprise, the countess also said that she would
-like to go. It would be a relief from the monotony of sitting in the
-anchored steamboat.
-
-The promise of a small compensation made the two men very willing to
-row an extra load, and the countess and Chap, in company with the
-water-barrel, were pulled to the mainland. Here the two men set to
-work to fill the barrel, carrying the water in pails from the spring to
-the boat, and taking a good deal of time to do it, while Chap and the
-countess walked along the shore to survey the scene, the lady keeping
-a sharp lookout for any alligators that might be basking beneath the
-trees.
-
-The countess was very much disturbed at the interruption to her journey.
-
-“It is too bad,” she said, “that we are obliged to stay in this horrid
-place, and on that wretched little boat. There is no knowing how long
-we will have to wait here. The next thing will be that we will have to
-send ashore for something to eat as well as water to drink, and what
-they’ll find I’m sure I don’t know.”
-
-“I should think they’d send to the city for relief,” said Chap.
-
-“I suppose they will eventually,” the lady replied, “but they’ll have
-to wait for a steamboat to come along to do that. I don’t suppose they
-could row there.”
-
-At this moment she made an exclamation. They were now below the end of
-the island, and could see far down the river, which was here very wide.
-Two or three miles away was a large steamboat coming from the city.
-
-“Oh!” cried the countess; “do you see that? If I could only stop her,
-and get on board, I would go as far as she is going, and then come
-back in her to the city. Anything would be better than staying on that
-cramped-up little Winkyminky, with nothing to eat. I believe that would
-be the quickest way of getting to Jacksonville, and we would stop
-somewhere where I could telegraph to my husband. Oh! can’t we signal
-her?”
-
-“I’ll row out to her!” cried Chap. “I’ll stop her!”
-
-And turning, he ran as fast as he could to the place where the boat was
-hauled up.
-
-The men had just come down with a couple of pails of water, but when
-Chap promised them a dollar apiece to row him out to the approaching
-steamboat, they lifted out the barrel, half-filled with water, and
-attempted to push off the boat, but they found it stuck in the mud so
-tightly that it was almost impossible, and Chap raved and stamped at
-the fruitless result of their ill-managed efforts.
-
-The countess was now walking rapidly toward them, but Chap, hoping
-in his heart that nothing in the rules of aristocratic circles would
-prevent a fellow from wading in the mud in a good cause, pulled off his
-shoes and stockings, rolled up his trousers, and plunged in.
-
-By the united strength of the three the boat was soon afloat, and all
-jumped in. The negroes seized the oars, and Chap shouted to the lady
-that they would be back in no time.
-
-“Don’t fail to stop her!” cried the countess. “Tell them I’ll pay them
-for all the time they lose. It is the Humphrey Giles. The captain knows
-me.”
-
-The boat left the shore so rapidly that Chap scarcely caught the last
-of these words. He suddenly remembered that he was leaving a lady alone
-on the shore.
-
-“I never thought,” he said, “that she would be there all by herself.”
-
-“Dar’s nuffin’ dar to hurt her,” said one of the negroes, who was
-afraid Chap might change his mind and turn back, and so make them lose
-their money; “and we ain’t got no time to take her on if ye want to
-ketch that boat.”
-
-“That’s so,” said Chap; “and now give way, my hearties!”
-
-Chap had read tales of man-of-war life and of whaling voyages, and he
-knew that the way to make men row hard and fast was to yell and shout
-at them like mad, and for work of this kind no one was better adapted
-than the captain of the Rolling Stones.
-
-The negroes became so excited that they made the boat spin over the
-water. It stopped directly in the course of the Humphrey Giles, when
-that boat was a quarter of a mile away.
-
-Chap stood up in the stern, and frantically waved his hat, and
-shouted,--
-
-“Stop!”
-
-Perceiving that something was the matter, the captain of the great
-steamboat gave orders to slow up and back water, and as soon as she
-was stopped Chap was pulled to her side, and gave the news of the
-Winkyminky’s disaster, and the message of the countess.
-
-The countess was well known along the river, and apart from his
-willingness to assist the passengers of a disabled boat, the captain
-knew that he would be paid for any loss he might sustain by stopping.
-
-He asked Chap where the Winkyminky lay, and then told him that he would
-go up to the other end of the island, and if the countess and other
-passengers who might want to go on board the Giles could be brought to
-him without delay, he would wait for them, but that not a moment of
-time must be lost.
-
-At this instant a cry was heard from the upper deck.
-
-When Chap heard that cry, he sprang to his feet, and nearly fell
-backward out of the boat. Well he knew the voice, especially when it
-called his own name.
-
-“Helen!” he exclaimed.
-
-And sure enough, there was Helen leaning over the railing of the upper
-deck, and by her side was Mr. Godfrey Berkeley.
-
-When Chap saw his sister, he was at first utterly astounded. He simply
-stood and looked at her. Then he made a step forward to climb on board
-the steamboat. Then, at the same instant, he remembered the countess
-left on the lonely shore. A brief but sharp struggle took place within
-him.
-
-The captain again called out that no time must be lost, and that he
-could not wait long, and one of the hands ordered his negroes to back
-away from the steamboat.
-
-As far as he was concerned, there was no reason why he should not jump
-on board and rush to his sister, who was saying all sorts of things to
-him from above. But there was that countess! Oh, how he wished that he
-had brought her along with him! It would not do to trust those negroes
-to go back after her. They would bungle everything, and never get to
-the Giles in time. He had come on the lady’s errand, and was bound in
-honor to go back to her.
-
-The bell in the engine-room tinkled, and the negroes backed out of the
-way of the moving wheels.
-
-“I’ll come back directly, Helen!” screamed Chap. “I’ve got to fetch
-a countess! And now you fellows lay yourselves out! Another dollar
-apiece if you get us on board the Giles in time.”
-
-Chap exhorted and urged, occasionally turning to wave his hat to Helen,
-who shook her handkerchief at him until the island shut them out of
-sight of each other.
-
-When Mr. Berkeley had received, in Jacksonville, a telegram directed to
-John Robinson, stating that the boys would leave Sanford in the William
-Von Glode, he and Helen had kept a sharp lookout for that boat, and
-when she arrived they were at her pier, and were greatly troubled at
-finding no boys on board.
-
-Phil and Phœnix had never thought of telegraphing to Mr. Robinson that
-they had missed the Von Glode, and Mr. Berkeley could not imagine why
-they had not come.
-
-The gentleman with the blue shirt and the large family, who had come
-from Titusville, was on board, and he told Mr. Berkeley that the boys
-had certainly intended to come down on this boat, but just before she
-started he had heard something of a disturbance in the town, and as
-some disreputable characters were there, between whom and the boys
-there was an ill-feeling, he was afraid the young fellows had got into
-trouble, which had detained them.
-
-Mr. Berkeley immediately telegraphed to his friend in Sanford, but as
-that gentleman happened to be out of town that afternoon, his wife put
-the telegram away, as she was accustomed to do with his letters, until
-he should return.
-
-Receiving no answer, Mr. Berkeley and Helen took passage early the
-next morning on board the Humphrey Giles for Sanford. When they saw
-Chap in the stern of the little boat which had stopped the Giles,
-their astonishment was as great as they imagined it could be, but when
-he rowed frantically away to fetch a countess, their amazement was
-actually increased.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXII.
-
-CHAP IS DOWN UPON ARISTOCRACY.
-
-
-When Chap reached the spot where he left the water-barrel and the
-countess, he found the former sticking up in the mud, but there were
-no signs of the latter. Chap sprang into the mud, and struggled to
-shore. Where was she? He hoped she was waiting somewhere in the shade,
-but he could not find her. He called and shouted for her, but there
-was no reply. He was just giving himself up to despair, when one of
-the negroes cried out, “Dar she!” and pointed in the direction of the
-Winkyminky.
-
-And there, sure enough, was the countess and her colored servant in a
-boat, just pushing off from the Winkyminky, while the whistle of the
-Humphrey Giles could be heard from the other side of the island.
-
-The countess was a woman of action. As soon as Chap had left her, she
-had run along the shore, until she was opposite the Winkyminky, and
-shouted for some one to come over for her. If the Giles should consent
-to stop for her, she wanted to take her maid and some of her baggage
-with her, and there was no time to be lost. There was another boat on
-the Winkyminky, and it had been sent for her, and it was now about to
-take her and her maid around the upper end of the island to the Giles,
-whose whistle gave sufficient signal that she was there, and waiting.
-
-“Upon my word!” ejaculated Chap, as he gazed upon this scene.
-“Aristocrats and countesses, indeed! Give me a republican form of
-government!”
-
-And he dashed through the mud, and into the boat.
-
-“Never mind the water-barrel,” he cried. “Row after that boat. Another
-dollar if you catch it.”
-
-The negroes’ arms already ached from the violent rowing they had done,
-and Chap’s throat was sore from his continuous shouting; but the men
-bent again to their oars, and Chap’s former yells were nothing to what
-he uttered now. He felt sure that if the countess’s boat reached the
-Giles before he did, that steamboat would start off without him, and
-his sister, whose appearance on board was such an astounding mystery,
-would be carried away from him. The captain would not wait for anybody
-after the countess was on board. His soul was fired with rage at that
-treacherous woman, for whom he had taken so much trouble to return, and
-for whom he had probably lost his chance of joining his dear sister. If
-he could catch up with her, he would tell her a thing or two.
-
-“Tug at her! tug at her!” he shouted to the oarsmen. “Crack your backs!
-Break your bones! Give way, boys, give way! Why _don’t_ you pull? Jerk
-her out, boys! jerk her out!”
-
-And the two negroes, with bare heads, perspiration rolling down their
-cheeks, and their eyes and teeth glistening, as they rose in their
-seats with every wild pull at the oars, did almost jerk the boat out of
-the water in their frantic efforts to earn the money Chap had promised
-them.
-
-There was no rudder to the boat; but Chap sat in the stern, and by
-gestures and commands directed the oarsmen. He did not row toward the
-Winkyminky, but kept directly after the boat containing the countess.
-
-There was nearly half a mile distance between them when they started,
-and the upper point of the island was certainly less than a quarter of
-a mile above the foremost boat. So Chap had great odds against him as
-far as regards distance, and there seemed much reason to fear that the
-countess’s boat would round the point and reach the Humphrey Giles
-before Chap could be seen or heard; but the odds in other respects were
-somewhat in Chap’s favor.
-
-His men were now so thoroughly warmed up to their work that they forgot
-their arms had ached a little while before, and they pulled like
-tireless machines.
-
-The other boat had two strong oarsmen; but it carried two passengers
-and some baggage, and there was no wildly excited fellow in the stern
-to urge, with ringing battle-cry, his men to deeds of valor.
-
-Chap’s boat steadily gained upon the other, and the few people who were
-left on board the Winkyminky cheered and clapped him as he passed. They
-did not know whether he wanted to go on board the other steamboat or
-not; but they saw plainly enough that he had some reason for catching
-up with the countess.
-
-“I wish I knew how to make those fellows work like that,” said the
-captain of the Winkyminky, as he watched Chap’s boat. “They never
-pulled with such good will for me.”
-
-“Perhaps you could do it,” said the old gentleman who was standing by
-him, “if you would make yourself a raving lunatic like that boy. I
-believe he has scared those black fellows out of their wits, and that
-they are trying to get away from him.”
-
-The countess did not perceive the boat that was following them, and she
-knew nothing about the Giles, except that it was on the other side of
-the island, where it was certainly stopping, and occasionally blowing
-its whistle.
-
-The trees and high reeds prevented the countess’s boat from being
-seen from the Giles, and, as the captain might not know that a boat
-was coming to him, he might start off at any moment. Therefore, the
-countess was anxious to get in sight of the Giles as soon as possible,
-and urged her men to row as fast as they could, her words, however,
-having nothing like the same effect as the yells of Chap.
-
-When she went to the Winkyminky and then started for the Giles, she had
-no idea that she was behaving in a manner which Chap would consider
-treacherous. She did not know that he thought of going on board the
-Giles, and indeed he had said to her, when they were talking together,
-that he supposed he would have to stay by the Winkyminky until she was
-towed to the city. Of course the lady could not be supposed to imagine
-that the whole current of the boy’s feelings and intentions had been
-changed by his finding his only sister on board the Giles.
-
-There was a point of reeds which grew out into the water for ten
-or a dozen yards from the end of the island, and around these the
-countess’s men rowed their boat as rapidly as they could.
-
-The moment they were on the other side of them, and within sight of the
-waiting Giles, the countess waved her handkerchief above her head to
-attract attention to her approach.
-
-The people on the steamboat had, of course, been expecting a boat to
-come to them, and they were looking for it to come around the end of
-the island. And we may be quite certain that no one watched for it with
-greater eagerness than Helen and Mr. Berkeley. Their grief and dismay,
-therefore, when they saw two women in the stern of the boat and no
-Chap, need not be described. Was he not coming?
-
-If they could have looked through the reeds and bushes to the other
-side of the island they would have known that Chap was coming!
-
-The moment that the foremost boat turned the point of reeds, Chap’s
-frenzy doubled.
-
-“Wake up!” he screamed. “Are you going to sleep, and have me left? Ten
-more pulls, and we’ve got her! Give way now! Give way! Tear at it, I
-tell you! Tear at it!”
-
-They had now reached the reeds, but Chap had no intention of going
-around them. They were growing in the water, and the water would
-certainly float his boat.
-
-“Pull around, you Bill,” he cried. “Smash right through them! Drive
-her through, boys! Drive her through!”
-
-The tall reeds bent beneath the sudden dash of the boat and the wild
-sweep of the oars; and in a few seconds Chap’s little craft was out in
-the open water beyond.
-
-Just ahead of her, and not twenty feet away, was the countess’s boat.
-Chap’s men were rowing as madly as ever, and in a few strokes they
-would be upon it.
-
-“Stop!” yelled Chap. “Back water!”
-
-But these words had no effect on his two negroes. He had been shouting
-and yelling to them ever since they started, and they did not now
-notice what he said. They were so filled with savage excitement that
-they paid no attention to mere words.
-
-The men in the other boat tried to pull out of the way, but they were
-not quick enough. Chap’s boat crashed into that of the countess,
-smashing in one side, and nearly turning it over with the violence of
-the shock.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXIII.
-
-WHICH FINISHES THE STORY.
-
-
-When Chap’s boat dashed into that of the countess, it struck the latter
-craft on one side, near the stern, crashing into her as if she had
-been an earthen pot. The water would have instantly rushed in had not
-this broken side been lifted in the air by the violence of the shock,
-turning the countess and her woman into the water as neatly as if they
-had been slipped out of a ladle.
-
-One of the oarsmen also went overboard, but the other one sprang to his
-feet at the moment of collision, and jumped on Chap’s boat.
-
-The two negroes who had been rowing Chap looked around, utterly dazed
-by the shock, while our hero, as pale as a sheet, sat speechless in the
-stern. He could scarcely believe that this dreadful thing had happened;
-but in an instant his face flushed, and he was on his feet.
-
-About a yard from him, the face and arms of the countess appeared above
-the water. Chap’s first impulse was to jump in after her; but, instead
-of doing that, he threw himself down flat in the boat, and stretching
-himself out from its side like an opening telescope, he seized the lady
-just as she was going down again. He was leaning so far out of the
-boat, that not only did he have no power to hold her up, but his head
-and shoulders went down also, their weight assisting her to sink. He
-would have gone entirely out of the boat if he had not hooked his toes
-into the boards at the bottom.
-
-It is probable, however, that both he and the countess would have been
-drowned, for a boy might as well have his whole body under water as to
-have his head there, had not the man who had jumped from the other boat
-perceived the danger, and, slipping by the astonished oarsmen, who were
-looking behind them in the vain attempt to make out what had happened,
-seized Chap by the legs, and drew him in, bringing also the countess to
-the surface. The other men now sprang to the rescue, and the lady was
-lifted into the boat.
-
-The moment she found herself in the air, she gave a great gasp and sank
-upon a seat, breathing hard and fast.
-
-“All right?” anxiously cried Chap, his face and hair dripping with
-water.
-
-The lady nodded and went on with her panting. She had been taught
-by her husband that if she ever fell into the water, the important
-thing to do was to hold her breath, and this she had done during the
-very short time she had been beneath the surface. But if she had not
-entirely forgotten to do anything else, she might have had a more
-comfortable time. The spot where she fell in was not over four feet
-deep, and if she had stood upon the bottom, her head would have been
-above the water; but her whole soul was possessed with the one idea of
-holding her breath, and she never thought of such a thing as trying to
-stand on her feet.
-
-The negro woman and the man who had fallen overboard had speedily found
-a foothold, and had stood up, and, with dripping heads and faces, were
-now wading toward Chap’s boat.
-
-Into this they were helped, for the other boat had filled with water,
-and sunk.
-
-The two valises of the countess were fished up from the bottom by
-one of the men, and deposited in the boat. The floating oars of the
-sunken boat were picked up, and the negroes proceeded to row Chap’s
-heavily-laden craft toward the Giles.
-
-All the condemnation of aristocratic institutions which Chap intended
-hurling at the head of the countess was entirely forgotten. He felt
-that her misfortunes had sufficiently established the fact that even
-the highest rank and the proudest lineage must sometimes give way
-before the rapid advance of republican vengeance.
-
-As for the countess, she said never a word. She was entirely occupied
-in getting back her breath, and in trying, with the help of her woman,
-to put her hat and hair into decent order.
-
-On board of the Humphrey Giles, there had been a great deal of
-excitement and anxiety.
-
-When the boat containing the shouting Chap and his frantic oarsmen
-rushed out of the reeds, and sprang like a wild beast on the other
-boat, the people on board the Giles, who witnessed the occurrence, gave
-a cry of horror.
-
-The captain ordered a boat to be lowered to go to the rescue, but
-before it could be got ready, all the capsized people were in Chap’s
-boat, and it was being rowed toward the steamboat.
-
-Helen, with great delight, recognized her brother, but Mr. Berkeley was
-much troubled. Where was his boy--his Phil? and where was young Poole?
-
-The Humphrey Giles was detained much longer than her captain expected
-she would be. Everybody on board wanted to know all about what had
-happened, but no one except Chap seemed able to tell anything, and he
-was so busily engaged hugging and kissing a girl in a straw hat, that
-he paid no attention to the questions of anybody.
-
-Mr. Berkeley, however, presently succeeded in getting the information
-that the two other boys were safe at Sanford. Then Chap’s two oarsmen
-had to be paid, which took every cent he had, and then one of the men
-who had rowed the countess said his captain would want to be paid for
-the boat that was smashed.
-
-This matter was soon settled by Mr. Berkeley agreeing to make
-compensation when they should get back to Jacksonville, and then, after
-a message had been delivered from the captain of the Winkyminky to the
-captain of the Humphrey Giles, requesting the latter to telegraph to
-the city the condition of the disabled steamboat, the Winkyminky’s men
-rowed away in their boat, and the Giles proceeded on her way.
-
-Chap’s story was a long one, and had many eager listeners, but he did
-not begin it until he had fully satisfied himself how Helen and Mr.
-Berkeley happened to be there.
-
-“I feel like another man,” said Mr. Berkeley, when all had been told,
-“now that I know where Phil and Phœnix are.”
-
-“It would be just our luck,” said Chap, “if those fellows should take
-some other boat and pass us, and go on to Jacksonville.”
-
-“You need not try to frighten me that way,” said Mr. Berkeley. “No
-boat has passed us yet, and I have made arrangements with our captain
-to stop and hail any boat we may meet, night or day, until we reach
-Sanford. So I don’t think we shall miss them that way.”
-
-“My gracious, Chap!” exclaimed Helen, when she had sufficiently
-recovered from her excitement to notice something more than the face
-of her dear brother; “do you wear knickerbockers? And what kind of
-stockings have you got on?”
-
-“Why,” said Chap, looking down below his rolled-up trousers, “those are
-not stockings. That is St. John’s River mud. You see I’ve been wading,
-and, as for my shoes and stockings, I left them over on the bank, where
-I have been getting water. I don’t cut a very handsome figure, do I?”
-
-Mr. Berkeley and Helen gazed at the long-legged boy, who had lost his
-hat, and whose wet hair was sticking out in all directions, and they
-burst into a laugh, in which Chap unhesitatingly joined.
-
-“I expect the people must have wondered,” said Helen, “when they saw
-me kiss such an awful-looking boy, but I was glad enough to get the
-chance.”
-
-“We could all see that,” said Mr. Berkeley; “and now I’ll take him down
-below, and see what can be done for him.”
-
-When Chap returned on deck, washed, combed, and dressed in a complete
-suit, which had been loaned him by the purser, he was a well-dressed
-and very gentlemanly-looking person. He did not see the countess that
-day, as she did not come out from her state-room, but both he and
-Mr. Berkeley made inquiries about her, and ascertained that she had
-sustained no injury. But early the next morning, just before the boat
-reached Sanford, Chap saw the countess on the deck. He went up to her,
-but she looked at him coldly, and made no sign of recognition; but when
-he spoke she opened her eyes.
-
-“Are you the boy,” she exclaimed, “who stopped this steamboat for me?”
-
-“And who afterward upset you in the river,” said Chap. “Yes; all of me
-that isn’t purser of this boat is that boy.”
-
-“But how did you come to run into us that way?” she asked.
-
-Chap then explained how he thought he had been deserted by her, and
-how, in his anxiety to overtake her, the accident had occurred.
-
-“Well,” said she, when she had asserted that she had no idea of
-treating him in that dreadful way, “you gave me a bad wetting and a
-great fright, but you also helped and amused me very much, and, on the
-whole, I am glad I met you.”
-
-And she cordially shook hands with him.
-
-“And now,” said Chap, as he rejoined Helen, “I’m done with the
-aristocracy. It will do very well in certain quarters, but republican
-institutions for me.”
-
-Phil and Phœnix were on the pier when the Humphrey Giles arrived at
-Sanford. They had received a telegram from John Robinson the day
-before, sent from a point below on the river, telling them to wait at
-Sanford for the Giles. They had wondered at the message, and would have
-waited anyway, as there had been no chance for them to leave. But when
-Chap, handsomely dressed, appeared on the gang-plank, conducting Helen
-and Mr. Berkeley, Phil and Phœnix could not have been more astonished
-had they seen an alligator stand up on its tail and sing “The Last Rose
-of Summer.”
-
-“What grates on me,” said Phil, laughing, as they sat on the porch of
-Mr. Berkeley’s friend, the magistrate, “is to see Chap dressed up in
-that fine fashion, while Phœnix and I are going about in these old
-flannel clothes.”
-
-“You forget,” said Chap, sitting up as straight as possible in his
-chair; “that I am your captain, and, therefore, ought to be better
-dressed. There is nothing that makes fellows knuckle down to rank and
-dignity like appropriate costume.”
-
-“Well,” said Phœnix, “as we haven’t knuckled down much so far, I
-suppose we might as well do it until the purser makes you take off his
-clothes.”
-
-“And when we get to Jacksonville,” said Mr. Berkeley; “I will have you
-all refitted.”
-
-That afternoon, when the Humphrey Giles started northward, or down the
-St. John’s River to Jacksonville, our friends were on board of her.
-
-After some persuasion from Mr. Berkeley the worthy magistrate consented
-to let Chap go, and depend upon the testimony of Adam for the
-conviction of the two young men who had committed the assault.
-
-That individual had sold his little bears to a man who was going North,
-and, having a good job of work, he did not wish to leave Sanford. He
-came down to the pier to see his former companions depart, and bade
-them a hearty good-by.
-
-“It is a great pity, boys,” said Helen, when they were all in the hotel
-at Jacksonville, getting ready to start homeward,--“it is a great pity
-that you brought nothing with you from your Indian River trip, not a
-shell, nor a sea-bean, nor even any of that beautiful Spanish moss
-which hangs from the trees.”
-
-“Helen,” cried Chap, “what are you talking about? Don’t you know that
-rolling stones gather no moss?”
-
-And, majestically waving his hand, he walked away.
-
-The homeward trip, though marked by no exciting incidents, was a
-delightful one for all the party; and the mail from Boontown, which
-carried to the colonel in Titusville a cheque for the amount due him by
-the Rolling Stones, also carried a full account of this journey in a
-letter from Helen to Mary Brown, the girl who could not remember ever
-having seen another girl.
-
-
-THE END.
-
-
-
-
-Books for Boys by Popular Authors.
-
-Illustrated. Crown 8vo. Cloth, $1.50 per volume.
-
-THE ORACLE OF BAAL.
-
- A Narrative of some Curious Events in the Life of Professor Horatio
- Carmichael, M.A. Edited by J. PROVAND WEBSTER. With numerous
- illustrations by Warwick Goble.
-
-THE YOUNG CASTELLAN.
-
- A Tale of the English Civil War. By GEORGE MANVILLE FENN. Illustrated.
-
-TROOPER ROSS AND SIGNAL BUTTE.
-
- By CAPTAIN CHARLES KING, U.S.A. Illustrated by Charles H. Stephens.
-
-CHUMLEY’S POST.
-
- A Story of the Pawnee Trail. By WILLIAM O. STODDARD. Illustrated by
- Charles H. Stephens.
-
-CAPTAIN CHAP;
-
- Or, THE ROLLING STONES. By FRANK R. STOCKTON. Illustrated by Charles
- H. Stephens.
-
-
-J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA.
-
-
-
-
-By CAPTAIN CHARLES KING, U. S. A.
-
-
-Trooper Ross and Signal Butte.
-
-Illustrated by Charles S. Stephens.
-
-Crown, 8vo. Cloth, $1.50.
-
- When Captain King sets his hand to a boy’s story he is sure to be an
- ideal creator of heroes. Redskins and blue-jackets, and lovely girls
- and daring youngsters are in his dramatic company; camp-fires, blazing
- villages, rifle-reports, and narrow escapes. He is never coarse nor
- sensational, but with his sweeping style carries you on from start to
- finish like a stiff and wholesome breeze.
-
- “They are just the stories to captivate the young
- reader.”--_Philadelphia Evening Bulletin._
-
- “Captain Charles King has never written more captivating stories of
- frontier life than the two that are embraced in this neat volume just
- issued.”--_San Francisco Bulletin._
-
- “Captain King has done many good things, but perhaps none better
- than these animated tales, which are full of Indians, good and bad,
- scouts, cowboys, and everything needful to keep a restless boy quiet
- on an evening.”--_Philadelphia Evening Telegraph._
-
- “The list of Captain King’s books for boys is in itself calculated to
- excite youthful imaginations and hold their attention unrelaxed to
- the close. These two latest stories contain all the striking features
- of its predecessors, the excitement, the fire, the geniality,
- the rapidity that have long delighted his large community of boy
- readers.”--_Boston Courier._
-
-
-J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA.
-
-
-
-
-The Mystery of the Island.
-
-By HENRY KINGSLEY.
-
- A Tale of Bush and Pampas, Wreck, and Treasure Trove. By the author
- of “Geoffrey Hamlyn,” “Ravenshoe,” etc., etc. A new edition, with
- illustrations by Warne Browne. 12mo. Cloth, $1.25.
-
-The Wizard King.
-
-By DAVID KER.
-
-Crown 8vo. Cloth, $1.50.
-
- “It is based upon careful study of history, is written graphically
- and even brilliantly, is absorbing from cover to cover, and has an
- excellent moral tone. It deserves to be a lasting favorite with the
- young people.”--_Boston Congregationalist._
-
-Hugh Melville’s Quest.
-
-By F. M. HOLMES.
-
-Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, $1.25.
-
- “Well written volumes that describe ancient history in an interesting
- manner are to be always welcomed. This volume will serve a good
- purpose by recalling days that were of prime importance in the making
- of the English nation.”--_New York School Journal._
-
-
-J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA.
-
-
-
-
-An Affair of Honor.
-
-By Alice Weber.
-
-Small 4to. Cloth, gilt, $1.25.
-
- “A delightful book for little folks. It is the story of a little child
- who is given the mission of exerting a life influence over an elder.
- The mission is one that every child can well seek, and the story
- unfolded so delightfully between these covers will suggest a way of
- doing this.”--_Cincinnati Commercial Gazette._
-
- “The little heroine, Alicia, has been taken by her brother in London
- to her grandmother in the country to stay and get the roses in her
- cheeks, while he, who is her next of kin, is away. There she makes
- the acquaintance of a little boy, and they become fast friends and
- co-workers in an affair of honor; and the story with rare beauty
- proceeds to illustrate the following exquisite thought by George
- Eliot: ‘In old days there were angels who came and took men by the
- hand and led them away from the city of destruction. We see no
- white-winged angels now. But yet men are led away from threatening
- destruction; a hand is put into theirs, which leads them forth gently
- towards a calm and bright land, so that they look no more backward;
- and the hand may be a little child’s.’”--_Boston Home Journal._
-
- “Robin and Alicia, the hero and heroine of the story, are two
- delightful creations, and the story of their child-life and the secret
- with which they find themselves burdened is charmingly told. There are
- other interesting characters in the book, which has a well-constructed
- and developed plot.”--_Philadelphia Record._
-
-Uncle Bill’s Children.
-
-By Helen Milman.
-
-With illustrations by the author. Small 4to. Cloth, $1.00.
-
- “Mamie and Jack of this volume, in their clever games and
- merrymakings, are two as delightful children as can be found within
- the covers of a book. The author does not attempt a difficult theme,
- but in her portrayal of child-life she meets with a success that is
- the outgrowth of a simple and healthy interpretation of the ways of
- the little ones.”--_Boston Herald._
-
- “Helen Milman will captivate the boys and girls by her really
- beautiful story of ‘Uncle Bill’s Children.’ The adventures and
- exclamations of little Mamie and Jack are as natural as childhood
- itself, and the wee hero and heroine as entertaining. There is an
- element of sly humor in the book that will appeal to older
- readers.”--_Minneapolis Tribune._
-
-
-J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA.
-
-
-
-
-Axel Ebersen,
-
-The Graduate of Upsula. By A. Laurie.
-
-12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
-
- “It is a suggestive as well as an interesting story.”--_Boston
- Literary World._
-
- “Aside from the beauty of the story itself, which has the charm of a
- boyish character, nobly natural and naturally noble, the book is an
- able exposition of the Lingg system of medical gymnastics, and
- presents some authenticated cases of relief and permanent cure
- effected by a persistent and intelligent use of gymnastic
- exercises.”--_Minneapolis Tribune._
-
-Charlie Lucken at School and College.
-
-By the Rev. H. C. Adams, M.A.
-
-With eight full-page illustrations by J. Finnemore. 12mo. Extra cloth,
-$1.50.
-
- Mr. Adams has long distinguished himself as a writer of books for
- boys. In the present instance he has drawn a hero of the type which
- all boys love. Charlie Lucken, both at school and college, was forever
- getting into trouble, and forever getting out of it again by what
- seemed wonderful good fortune; but it was always his kind heart, his
- high principle, or his manly temper that first involved him in
- difficulties and afterwards brought him safely through them.
-
-Maid Marian and Robin Hood.
-
-By J. E. Muddock.
-
-12mo. Cloth, $1.25. With twelve full-page illustrations by Stanley L.
-Wood.
-
- “The personal courage, skill in archery, boldness of enterprise, and
- generous disposition of this famous outlaw of the twelfth century,
- have made him a favorite hero, especially with young people, through
- all the centuries. Robin Hood was a Saxon of noble descent, and was
- unjustly outlawed through the hatred of the Norman conquerers, after
- having been condemned to death and made his escape from the dungeon in
- which he was confined. He gathered around him in Sherwood Forest a
- band of more than a hundred men as bold as himself, and for many years
- baffled all attempts to capture him. He robbed the rich and gave to
- the poor, and suffered no woman to be oppressed, or otherwise
- molested. Friar Tuck, Little John, Will Scarlet, and others of the
- leaders of the merry men, figure in Mr. Muddock’s romance, and many of
- their daring deeds and exciting adventures are recounted. But the main
- interest centres around Robin Hood and the beautiful and brave Maid
- Marian.”--_Boston Home Journal._
-
-
-J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA.
-
-
-
-
-The Boys’ Own Book of In-Door Games and Recreations.
-
- A POPULAR ENCYCLOPÆDIA FOR BOYS.
- Edited by G. A. Hutchinson.
- With over 700 illustrations. 528 pages. $1.75.
-
- It is especially a boy’s book, calculated to afford both pleasure
- and profit, treating of those topics in which boys take particular
- interest. There are chapters on gymnastic exercises, games, and
- sports of all kinds; the boy’s workshop; how to build boats, etc.;
- musical instruments; toys; conjurers and conjuring; ventriloquism;
- and pleasant and profitable occupation for spare hours.
-
- “It gives the boys such instruction as they like, and will keep many
- an active boy employed in his workshop and away from a companionship
- that is hurtful. It is both a useful and a beautiful book.”--_Chicago
- Inter-Ocean._
-
-Boys’ Own Book of Out-Door Sports.
-
-UNIFORM WITH BOYS’ OWN BOOK OF IN-DOOR SPORTS.
-
-Illustrated. 1 vol. 4to. Cloth, gilt, $1.75.
-
- Containing articles on swimming, boating, cycling, hare and hounds,
- skating, lawn-tennis, foot-ball, etc. In short, an encyclopædia of
- just those things which boys want to know about.
-
- “This is a capital book,” says the _New York Independent_. “The
- illustrations, diagrams, and drawings are very numerous and excellent;
- and the subject is treated in every aspect and variety by competent
- writers, who describe well and have the art of lending a charm to
- their dullest details.”
-
-
-J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA.
-
-
-
-
-TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:
-
-
- Italicized text is surrounded by underscores: _italics_.
-
- Obvious typographical errors have been corrected.
-
- Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized.
-
- Archaic or variant spelling has been retained.
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN CHAP ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
-Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg™ electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
-Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work
-on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the
-phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project
-Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg™ License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format
-other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
-Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
-provided that:
-
-• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation.”
-
-• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™
- works.
-
-• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right
-of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you “AS-IS”, WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™
-
-Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™'s
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.